JP6900656B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a ball gaming machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting port provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is set. It is known that a large number of game balls (game media) can enter the winning opening (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-004177

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in preferably utilizing the limited region of the gaming member constituting the gaming region.

Therefore, it is an object of the gaming machine according to the present invention to improve the limited region of the gaming member constituting the gaming region so that it can be suitably used.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is used to solve the above problems.
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A first ball passage provided in a game area through which a game ball launched by the launching means can pass, and
A branch portion formed with an opening so as to penetrate the game member constituting the game area on the upstream side of the first ball passage in the front-rear direction, and the game ball that has not entered passes through the first ball passage. Then, a branch portion that guides the entered game ball to a different side of the game member in the front-rear direction from the first ball passage, and
A game ball that has entered the branch portion is located on the front side or the rear side of the game area where the first ball passage is provided and at a position that overlaps at least a part of the first ball passage in the front-rear direction. The second ball passage provided so that it can pass through,
The approach probability changing means, which is arranged so that the approach probability of the game ball to the branch portion can be changed by the launch operation of the game ball, is provided .
The approach probability changing means is provided with a flow-down area on the left side where the game ball flows down on the left side when viewed from the player side, and a flow-down area on the right side where the game ball flows down on the right side.
An approachable state in which the game ball enters the branch portion after contacting the approach probability changing means and the game ball can enter the second ball passage.
A state in which more game balls flow down the flow-down region on the left side of the approach probability changing means without the game balls entering the branch portion than in the approachable state.
The state in which more game balls flow down the flow-down region on the right side with respect to the approach probability changing means without the game ball entering the branch portion than in the approachable state is changed by the launch operation of the game ball. Is characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

With the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the limited region of the gaming member constituting the gaming region so that it can be suitably utilized.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a game machine Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in the open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state Front view of pachinko machine Front view showing the state where the front block of the pachinko machine is removed Front view of the game board Rear perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Partially enlarged front view of the game board Partially enlarged front view of the game board Partially enlarged front view of a modified example of the game board A partially enlarged front view of the right side of the game board in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. Flow chart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment Timing chart showing the operation of the lower prize winning device in the favorable fluctuation state Front view showing an example of a decorative design display device on which information on the ability to leave the seat is displayed. Front view of the game board in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment A partially enlarged front view of the right side of the game board in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. A partially enlarged front view of the lower right side of the game board in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the upper right side of the game board in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in line AA of FIG. 23 (a). Is.

Regarding the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, the pachinko machine 100 as an example of the ball game machine which is a kind of the gaming machine will be described, and then the modified example and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, the structural configuration, the electrical configuration, and various control processes of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in order.

<Structural structure>
First, the configuration of the structural portion of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 integrated with the outer frame 101. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is open to the intermediate block 103. Shown. Further, FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. In addition, various wirings are omitted in each figure, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, and each of these parts is relatively operated by a predetermined operation. It is configured to be displaceable.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body supporting means for supporting the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 101 is, for example, a substantially four-sided frame body to which the top plate portion 111, the bottom plate portion 112, the left side plate portion 113, and the right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and the pachinko machine 100 is installed. It is fitted into the game machine installation equipment (island equipment) provided in the game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). The outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 100, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101, and has a main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101. A support mechanism for supporting the island and a part of the locking mechanism for locking the main body thereof may be provided in the island equipment.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (connected) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 rotates on one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation tip side.

As shown in FIG. 1, for example, the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided apart from the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the outer frame 101. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, the shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by the shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101, and the shaft portion is provided in the shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. Is configured to be rotatable by being in a state of being inserted. The configuration in which the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 can be rotated is not limited to the above configuration, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removal operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. On the other hand, it is detachably attached. For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 by a certain amount or more and moving the intermediate block 103 upward by a certain amount. To. As a result, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

The front block 102 is arranged so as to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the front side, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in the front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 rotatably forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove the front block 102 by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

The rear block 104 is arranged so as to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the rear side, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are connected by the rear block support mechanism 136, 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side of the front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configurations as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 so as to be rotatable rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. In addition, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined removal operation.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that regulates the opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front. There is a lock operation mechanism that is operated to unlock and lock the block lock mechanism. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

When a clockwise rotation operation is performed using an operation key (not shown) as a predetermined operation for the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as part of the intermediate block locking mechanism and the movable portion 143 is released, and the intermediate block 103 is in an open / closed allowable state with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates in response to the counterclockwise rotation operation of the key cylinder 141 by a predetermined operation key. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 145 and the movable portion 144 provided in the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism is released, and the front block 102 is in an open / close allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism that regulates the opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. After that, the rear block 104 can be switched between a state in which opening and closing is prohibited (opening and closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening and closing is permitted (opening and closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation by the rear block opening / closing regulation mechanism. It is said that.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism is composed of, for example, two opening / closing restricting units 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening / closing restricting unit 150C provided in the rear block 104. .. Rotating pieces 151A to 151C capable of rotating operations are provided in these three opening / closing restricting units 150A to 150C. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change the engagement state with the opening portions arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction in the closed state of the rear block 104 by the rotation operation, whereby the opening / closing prohibition posture corresponding to the opening / closing prohibition state is changed. It is possible to switch between and the open / close allowable posture corresponding to the open / close allowable state. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are set to the open / close allowable posture, each of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is in the open / close allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. As for the open / close prohibition posture and the open / close allowance posture, the open / close prohibition state and the open / close allowance state may be switched by changing at least one of the positions and directions of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C, and the configuration is such that only rotation is performed at a fixed position. It may be configured to move in a certain direction, or it may be configured to operate by combining movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members in each device shift between a plurality of postures.

Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them are formed in the rear block 104 in a state where the rear block 104 is prohibited from opening and closing, as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C, which is exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening and corresponds to the remaining portion, is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103 as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the open / close allowable posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, thereby providing crime prevention. Has been raised.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement regulation mechanism that regulates the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement regulation mechanism is composed of a combination of a flow control piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a regulation change unit 162 provided in the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 is urged by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In the state where the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the closed state of the front block 102), the flow control piece 161 is set to a movement allowable state that allows the flow of the game ball. It is pushed toward the rear side of the intermediate block 103 by the changing portion 162. The flow control piece 161 is arranged so as to be displaced to the rear side with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement allowable state. As a result, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the front block 102 is open), the pressure of the flow control piece 161 by the regulation changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. The flow control piece 161 protrudes toward the front block 102, and the movement is prohibited. The flow control piece 161 projects into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the game ball from flowing down to the downstream side. As a result, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, in the pachinko machine 100, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 at the lower end portion on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (left side when viewed from the rear). An open / close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the switch is set is provided, and as shown in FIG. 3, for example, an intermediate block is provided at the lower end portion on the front side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation tip side (right side when viewed from the front). An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided with respect to the 103.

Next, each configuration of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be described in order.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 is a substantially rectangular member that forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and has a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly composed of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts to the front and rear of the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central portion of the front block 102 in front view. It is attached as. In the state where the base frame 201 constituting the front block 102 and the front decorative body 210 are combined, the opening 210A is formed through in the front-rear direction over a wide range excluding the outer peripheral portion to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through the opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, and a main storage mechanism 230. It includes an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls, and a launch operation device 250 operated by a player to sequentially launch the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 onto the game board 400.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 has an opening peripheral edge portion 211 surrounding the peripheral edge of the opening 210A and a protrusion forward on the lower side with respect to the opening 210A as a part of the front decorative body 210. The upper protruding portion 217, the lower protruding portion 218 located on the lower side with respect to the upper protruding portion 217 and projecting forward, and the upper protruding portion 217 and the lower protruding portion on the right side of the lower protruding portion 218. A flat portion 219, which is composed of a substantially flat region located behind 218 and in which the launch operating device 250 is arranged, is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is arranged on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is arranged on the lower protrusion 218.

The central panel 220 has a function as a cover body that makes it possible to visually recognize the rear side while closing the opening 210A that is formed through the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, for example, the central panel 220 has a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 and a light transmissive fitted to the front side of the panel frame 221. A front plate 222 (see FIG. 1) and a light-transmitting rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted to the rear side of the panel frame 221 substantially in parallel with the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap. There is.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and game balls rented from the game hall. As shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes, for example, a storage unit 231, a ball pulling mechanism (not shown), and a ball pulling operation member 232 for operating the ball pulling mechanism. The storage section 231 includes an inflow port 231A for flowing the game ball from the inside of the pachinko machine 100 into the storage section 231 and an outlet (not shown) for flowing out the game ball from the storage section 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100. An outlet (not shown) formed on the upstream side of the outlet is provided. By opening the discharge port, the game ball is discharged from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the inside of the pachinko machine 100. The ball pulling mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outlet and the discharge port.

The game balls acquired according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent out according to the lending operation to the lending operation device 292 described later flow into the storage unit 231 mainly through the inflow port 231A. Further, the storage unit 231 has an opening formed on the upper side, through which a game ball owned by the player is manually inserted or a game ball rented out at the game hall is supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outlet and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being arranged in a row. When the ball pulling operation (for example, pressing operation) is not performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball pulling operation is performed on the ball pulling operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage unit 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and the discharge port 241B. It is provided with a ball pulling mechanism 243 for causing the ball to be pulled out, and a ball pulling operation member 242 for operating the ball pulling mechanism 243. The game balls and the like acquired according to the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage unit 231 is full, they flow into the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241A. Further, the game ball flows from the storage unit 231 into the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241C even when the ball removal operation is performed on the ball removal operation member 232.

The bottom surface of the storage unit 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. When the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball pulling operation on the ball pulling operation member 242, the discharge port 241B remains in the opened state until the returning operation (for example, the pressing operation again) is performed on the ball pulling operation member 242. Be maintained. Behind the inflow port 241A, a ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the launch operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, and a rotatable launch handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251. A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the launch handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that the player is in contact with the launch handle 252, and the launch handle 252. It includes a launch stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that invalidates the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotated by the player, the game ball is ejected from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with a strength corresponding to the amount of the rotation operation. If the contact sensor 254 does not detect contact between the launch handle 252 and the player, or if the launch operation is invalidated by the operation of the launch stop switch 255, the launch handle 252 is rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launching device 330.

Further, a frame light emitting device 271-275 (see FIG. 10) is provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271-275 are arranged so as to overlap the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge portion 211 includes an upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left side edge portion 211B and an upper right side edge portion 211C located on both left and right sides with respect to the upper central edge portion 211A, and an upper left side edge portion 211. The left edge portion 211D located on the lower side with respect to the 211B and the right edge portion 211E located on the lower side with respect to the upper right side edge portion 211C are provided as light emitting portions, and the frame emits light corresponding to the respective light emitting portions. Devices 271-275 are installed.

The frame light emitting devices 271-275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left side edge portion 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting device corresponding to the upper right side edge portion 211C. It is composed of a device 273, a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge portion 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge portion 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271-275 electrically connects one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) as light emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and these electronic components in an integrated manner. It has a printed circuit board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G, for example, above the opening peripheral edge portion 211, and these upper left acoustic output ports 211F. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right acoustic output port 211G and the upper right acoustic output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located behind (rearward) the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with a game ball lending device 290, for example, on the upper right side portion of the upper protruding portion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays numerical values according to the remaining amount of banknotes, cards, etc. inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side in the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending device 291. It includes a lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving the payment, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning the bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit. When a banknote, a card, or the like is inserted into the card unit and a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in the valid state in which the numerical value corresponding to the amount of money is displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. A predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104 accordingly, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated as the game balls are rented out. On the other hand, when the return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, the equivalent of the banknote corresponding to the balance and the card recording the balance are returned from the card unit according to the return operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 capable of performing an input operation different from the firing operation by the player. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a press operation device 261 capable of a push operation, a rotation operation device 262 capable of a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 capable of operating in the up, down, left, and right directions. These operation devices 261 to 263 are used for an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player. It is possible to execute production setting operations that enable the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the previous game by inputting information, and these operations can be executed by the player or the manager of the game hall as needed. It is said that. The input operation unit (for example, the annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) that the player comes into contact with in the input operation device 260 is rotated and moved up and down by the input operation unit drive means such as a motor and a solenoid. Or, it is preferable that operations such as vibration can be performed by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), and the operation is preferably configured before and after the input operation or during the input operation. By operating the input portion at any or a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects accompanied by the input operation, such as actively encouraging the input operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a member having a substantially rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and a function of integrating the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame. A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on commands from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) to eject, the main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the back side of the game board 400 to control the game progress in an integrated manner, and the main control device 370. It is equipped with a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) that controls game production and status notification.

As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 includes a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding the game ball released from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, to the front block 102 is formed therein. A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B in which the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wirings inserted through the opening 301B are provided in various devices (for example, frame light emitting devices 271-) provided in the front block 102. 275, upper left acoustic device 281 and upper right acoustic device 282) for electrically connecting devices provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 (for example, main control device 370 and sub control device 390). The signal relay device 311 including wiring has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat plate-shaped base 401 having a through hole through which a game ball such as a discharge port 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. The 402, the inner rail 403 that smoothly curves from the lower right to the upper left of the base 401, the return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left tip of the inner rail 403, and the upper right tip of the outer rail 402. It is provided with a rebound prevention member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides the game ball launched from the launching device 330, which will be described later, into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed in the portion where the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 face each other in parallel to return to the launch passage 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorbing property that prevents a large recoil of the game ball such that the game ball heading to the right side beyond the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left side via the upper center again. However, it is made of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion on the back side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the guiding member 335 that guides the game ball from the launching device 330 toward the launching passage 401B and the outer rail 402, and the ball is launched from the launching device 330 but does not exceed the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning from the passage 401B is returned from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below the gap.

The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (flows down) while falling in the game area due to its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape in which most of the area has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The outer peripheral portion of the game area is generally divided by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is divided into a substantially flat shape by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is substantially flat by the base 401 of the game board 400. It is divided into. Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 includes a ball feeding mechanism 331 that sequentially sends out the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the firing position, and a ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). (See), the launch mechanism 333 that ejects the game ball arranged at the launch position, the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and the game ball launched from the launch mechanism 333 on the game board 400. It is provided with a guide member 335 that guides the vehicle to the launch passage 401B. As described above, the launch device 330 operates in response to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250, and the drive control of the launch solenoid 334 changes according to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250 to adjust the launch force.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 371 having a halved structure for accommodating the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed inside a translucent board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

Further, the main control device 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400. Specifically, a mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the base 401 of the game board 400 on the back side, and a main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. As a result, not only the back side (front side) of the main control device 370, but also the front side (back side) of the main control device 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main control device 370 is attached to the game board 400. It is said that it can be easily confirmed with it attached. The main control device 370 may be connected to the mounting portion 372 so as not to be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal status of the main control device 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a halved structure for accommodating the sub-control board 940. Like the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 is housed inside a translucent board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace. It is attached to the back side.

Here, various structures arranged in the game area on the game board 400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base 401, a flow change member such as a nail 411 and a windmill 412 that change the flow direction and flow speed of the game ball, and a center arranged substantially in the center of the base 401. The structure 420, the starting device (specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B) arranged below the central structure 420 and the first special symbol, and the center. A starting device (specifically, a right starting winning device 432) arranged on the lower right side of the structure 420 and a large winning device 433 arranged below the right starting winning device 432. , 434 (specifically, the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434), the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the right starting winning device 432, and the game board 400. The combination operating device 435 located on the upper right side and above (upstream side) with respect to the upper and lower large winning devices 433 and 434, and the general winning device 439A arranged on both the left and right sides of the lower middle starting winning device 431B. , 439B and.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned upper middle start winning device 431A and the like (see FIG. 10), and corresponds to each switch. It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into a predetermined area. For example, a middle start winning switch (upper middle start winning switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A, and a middle starting winning switch (lower) that detects a game ball that has entered the lower middle starting winning device 431B. Side middle start winning switch 441B), right starting winning switch 442 that detects the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432, lower grand winning switch 443 that detects the game ball that has entered the lower grand winning device 433, upper grand winning device Upper prize winning switch 444 that detects the game ball that has entered 434, the combination operation switch 445 that detects the game ball that has entered the combination operation device 435, the start switch 446 that detects the game ball that has entered the start device 436, and below. A non-specific passage switch 447 that detects a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown in FIG. 7) formed inside the grand prize device 433, and a specific passage formed inside the lower grand prize device 433 (not shown). A specific passage switch 448 that detects a game ball that has entered (not shown in FIG. 7), a general prize switch 449A, 449B that detects a game ball that has entered the general prize devices 439A, 439B, and the like are installed on the game board 400. ing.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with various sensors for fraud prevention (see FIG. 10), and it is possible to detect an abnormality generated in the pachinko machine 100. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, and the like are installed on the game board 400.

The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 constitutes an entry port, and the game ball that has entered each entry port is discharged to the game area. Games of each winning device, specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A, the lower middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, the upper winning device 434 and the general winning device 439A, 439B. The entrance portion of the ball constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball entering each winning opening is guided to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401 through a through hole formed in the base 401. .. Further, the game ball that has not entered each winning device is guided to the collection / discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided in the most downstream side portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection / discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters any of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls according to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, or a device in which two or more winning devices (for example, an upper middle starting winning device 431A and a lower middle starting winning device 431B) are integrated. The winning device may be configured by the above, and the starting device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game balls enter. It may be used as an entrance where the ball is released again into the game area without being paid out.

Each of the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B, and the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B related to the first special symbol does not change the entry probability of the game ball and enters them. The game ball is guided to the back side of the base 401. Further, the right-starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of the game ball entering the inside thereof. It should be noted that the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball does not have to be provided only in the starting device related to the second special symbol, and instead of or in addition to the starting device related to the first special symbol, the general winning device. It may be provided in any one or more of 439A and 439B. Further, the mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball may be configured by a driving means such as an electrically driven solenoid, or is represented by a mechanism that operates by the own weight of the game ball that has entered a predetermined area. It may be configured by a mechanically operating mechanism.

The right-starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a right-entry regulation mechanism 452 and a right-entry regulation mechanism that change the entry probability of a game ball into the inside by shifting between an entry-allowed posture and an entry-prohibited posture. It is equipped with a right entry control solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) that drives 452. The right entry control mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces driven by the right entry control solenoid 462, and when the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces enter the entrance (winning opening). ) Is narrowed (or closed) so that the game ball cannot enter the right start winning device 432, but when the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture, two movable pieces are at their tips. The game ball can enter the right-starting winning device 432 by arranging the portions so that the distance between the portions is widened. The right entry regulation mechanism 452 enters the right when the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol is won by a lottery based on the detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter, also referred to as "normal symbol lottery"). According to the drive by the regulation solenoid 462, the posture shifts to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower entry prize device 433 includes a lower entry regulation mechanism 453 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the lower entry regulation mechanism 453. By shifting between the lower entry control solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 453 and the non-guided posture and the guided posture, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is placed in the non-specific passage or the specific passage. A distribution mechanism for distribution and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for switching the guidance destination of the game ball by changing the posture of the distribution mechanism are provided. When the lower entry control mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning device 433 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the lower prize winning device 433 because the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning opening). When the lower entry control mechanism 453 is in the entry allowable posture, the lower entry control mechanism 453 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433. In addition, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided posture protruding forward, and when the distribution mechanism is in a guided posture immersed in the rear. Will be guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the gaming state, and when the game ball enters the specific passage, the player is given an advantageous gaming state as a privilege. ..

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper prize winning device 434 includes an upper entry regulation mechanism 454 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the inside by the transition between the entry allowance posture and the entry prohibition posture, and the upper entry regulation mechanism 454. An upper entry control solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry control mechanism 454 is in the no-entry posture, the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning device 434 because the upper entry control mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning opening), but the upper entry control mechanism 454. When is in the admissible posture, the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the upper prize winning device 434.

In addition, as the approach permissible posture and the entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball into the inside of the right entry regulation mechanism 452 or the like, each mechanism is configured and the winning port (or ball entry port) of each device is formed. Corresponding to the change in posture of the operating member that switches between the special state in which the game ball can enter and the normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the positions and orientations of the operating member differs depending on each posture. All you need is. Further, as a mechanism for changing the approach probability of the game ball such as the right entry regulation mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter into the normal state, and the game ball is allowed to enter even in the normal state, which is special. In the state, the posture of the operating member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the normal state.

A game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 when a big hit lottery is won. Specifically, the game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B according to the first special symbol is detected by the upper middle starting winning switch 441A or the lower middle starting winning switch 441B. When a lottery based on (hereinafter, also referred to as "first special symbol lottery") is won, or a game ball that has entered the right-starting winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right-starting winning switch 442. When the lottery based on (hereinafter, also referred to as "second special symbol lottery") is won, at least one of the lower entry regulation solenoid 463 and the upper entry regulation solenoid 464 operates. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry control mechanism 453 and the upper approach control mechanism 454 takes an entry allowable posture for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. Further, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guided posture according to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the shift to the approach allowed posture of the lower approach restricting mechanism 453, and further switches to the guided posture after a predetermined time from the shift to the guided posture. When the solenoid 465 is stopped, it returns to the non-guided posture.

The combination operating device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 to start operation. After winning the big hit lottery, either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 starts operating on condition that the game ball of the winning combination operating device 435 passes. Therefore, when the player wins the big hit, the player can start the special game state at the timing intended by the player. It should be noted that it is not always necessary that either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 start the operation on the condition that the game ball of the combination operating device 435 passes, and instead of or instead of that. In addition, either the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434 may start operating after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 that display variable display of symbols and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 that display the number of times the game is held. A display having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are divided in advance in a light emitting region corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed according to the light emitting state.

Specifically, on the game board 400, the first special symbol is variablely displayed in accordance with the first special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A second special symbol display device 471 related to a special symbol, a second special symbol that is variablely displayed in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, and a second special symbol that is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol according to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 related to a special symbol, a special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a first special symbol, and a special symbol hold that displays the number of times a unit game is held related to a second special symbol. A display device 477 is provided. The right to the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol are reserved up to four times each. Here, the unit game is a game for one time executed based on one start winning, a winning / failing judgment of a lottery executed based on one starting winning, and a lottery based on the winning / failing judgment. It refers to a series of games including from the start to the end of the variable display until the result is displayed.

When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the start winning device 431 is the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) or the lower middle starting winning. Even if it is detected by the switch 441B (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 is detected by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10). However, the right to the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). .. Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emitting states (lighting, lighting, blinking) including a light emitting color). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol determine the number of holds depending on the combination of the light emitting states (turning off, lighting, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting units. indicate.

Further, the game board 400 relates to a normal symbol display device 473 that displays the normal symbol in a variable manner or displays the normal symbol with a stop symbol according to the lottery result in accordance with the normal symbol lottery, and the normal symbol. A normal symbol hold display device 478 that displays the number of times the right of the unit game is held is provided. The right to unit games related to ordinary symbols is reserved up to 4 times. In addition, when the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is held up to the maximum number of times, even if the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added. ..

The ordinary symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and is controlled by a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). An ordinary pattern is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting parts. Further, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of holds by a combination of the light emitting states (off, lit, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting units.

Further, on the game board 400, the decorative symbols may be variablely displayed or the decorative symbols may be fixedly displayed in the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative pattern display device 479 is provided. The variable display and the final display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the sub control board 940, and are substantially synchronized with the variable display and the final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and diverse effects are executed than in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, the game board 400 includes a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game based on the control by the sub-control board 940. Executes various light emission effects and status notification by light emission.

Here, various gaming states and transitions between gaming states will be described. The normal game state (hereinafter, also abbreviated as "normal game state") is a state in which the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter, also referred to as "non-time reduction state"). Correspond.

If a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (internal passage of the lower prize winning device 433) during the special game state that shifts based on the winning. Depending on whether or not, the gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state is different. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the variation display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time reduction state (hereinafter, "time reduction state"). (Also referred to as "low probability state"), and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as "low probability state"). In the following, it will also be referred to as the "short-time game state"). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the time is shortened and the jackpot winning probability in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than in the normal game state. It shifts to a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a "probability changing gaming state") which is (hereinafter also referred to as a "high probability state").

The time-saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), but then returns to the normal game state. Further, the probabilistic gaming state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), but then returns to the normal gaming state.

It should be noted that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state does not necessarily have to be the above-described configuration. For example, the high-probability state may be configured to continue until the next big hit is won, or the above-mentioned gaming state may be configured depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a gaming state different from each of the above-mentioned gaming states may be further included, or the gaming states may be shifted under conditions different from the above-mentioned conditions.

Next, the operations of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described roughly in chronological order. In the main control board 920, winning random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, stop pattern random numbers, and various variable pattern random numbers related to special symbols (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and various gaming states are generated. When a game ball that has entered any of the start winning devices 431A and 431B related to the first special symbol is detected by any of the medium start winning switches 441A and 441B (see FIG. 10), the start winning of the first special symbol It becomes. If the right to the unit game related to the first special symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the first special symbol, the winning random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the stop pattern random number related to the special symbol are acquired. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

The unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is neither in the special game state nor in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the unit game related to the first special symbol. If the rights to are not reserved, they are started immediately after the storage of those random numbers. In addition, even when the player is not in the special game state, when the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved or the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. Is started after the unit game related to all the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) held before the current prize is completed, the unit game based on the current start prize is started. If each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game by the random number is all held before the current start prize after the special game state. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

In addition, the unit game using random numbers acquired based on the start prize of the first special symbol is started after the end of all the unit games related to the second special symbol. That is, when each random number is acquired based on the start prize of the second special symbol after the current start prize, the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. It should be noted that the unit game based on the start prize of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be executed in preference to the unit game related to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not necessarily executed in the order of the start prize. It may be a configuration in which the unit superiority control according to the above is executed, or a configuration in which the two special symbols are not alternative and can be changed at the same time.

If a big hit is won in the 1st special symbol lottery based on the start prize of the 1st special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit winning of the 1st special symbol lottery based on the acquired big hit symbol random number ( The type of jackpot symbol) is determined. The type of the stop symbol corresponds to the type of the jackpot. For example, the number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds) corresponding to the number of times that the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture, A plurality of types of jackpots are set according to the type of gaming state such as the gaming state (whether or not to shift to the probabilistic gaming state) that shifts after the special gaming state, and the jackpot symbol is set for each type. If the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the jackpot symbol is set as the stop symbol.

After the first special symbol lottery, the first special is based on the current game state, lottery result, stop pattern random number value, various fluctuation pattern random number values, and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is held. The variation display time of the symbol is determined, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the variable display (variable effect) of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 are started, and the first special symbol is varied. The variable display according to a constant pattern is continued over the display time, and in the case of the decorative pattern, the variable display according to the variable display is continued over the variable display time. After that, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as the decorative symbol. The final display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined fixed time.

When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the confirmation display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 of the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 of the upper prize winning device 434 are in the approach allowable posture a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of jackpot. .. When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the grand prize switch 443, 444 during each approach allowable posture in the lower entry control mechanism 453 and the upper entry control mechanism 454, or a predetermined maximum. When the permissible entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Then, after the elapse of the predetermined entry prohibition time, either the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 returns to the approach allowable posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

The lower approach regulation mechanism 453 and the upper approach regulation mechanism 454 are configured so that only one of them takes an entry allowable posture during the special gaming state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special gaming state (after the opening period). ), One shifts to the first entry allowed posture. In addition, the special gaming state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses from the return to the entry prohibition posture in the final round, and after that, a predetermined waiting time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special gaming state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state.

In various game states, when the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442, the starting prize of the second special symbol is obtained. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times at the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on this starting prize is executed. Will be done. Further, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the execution of the variation display, the transition control of the game state, etc. are also executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol. Will be done.

In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the start device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, if the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number related to the normal symbol is acquired. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is not in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, during the unit game related to the ordinary symbol, the unit game related to the acquired ordinary symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the acquired ordinary symbol is completed.

In the unit game related to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the player has won based on the value of the winning random number, and if the unit game is won, a predetermined winning symbol is set as the stop symbol. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lost symbol is set as the stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-time reduction state, the fluctuation display by a constant pattern is continued for a predetermined variation display time, and the time reduction state is achieved. Continues the variation display according to a constant pattern for a predetermined variation display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With the passage of a predetermined time according to the game state, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the right approach restricting mechanism 452 of the right start winning device 432 shifts to the approach allowable posture at least once after the confirmation display of the normal symbol. Specifically, when the player wins in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state and special gaming state), the right start winning device 432 has a predetermined maximum approach time (for example, 0) for a predetermined number of times (for example, once). .2 seconds), and in the case of winning in the time saving state (time saving gaming state and probability variation gaming state), the right start winning device 432 is a predetermined number of times (more than in the non-time saving state). For example, the posture is intermittently shifted to the permissible approach posture for a predetermined maximum permissible approach time (for example, 4.8 seconds), which is longer than that in the non-time reduction state only (twice). However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 442, the right entry regulation mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the elapse of the maximum entry allowable time. Further, even if the number of transitions to the approach allowable posture has not reached a predetermined number of times, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game related to the normal symbol this time is completed.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, the player must first win the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball enters the right start winning device 432 in the right-starting winning device 432 based on the winning state. Must. The winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time in the entry allowed state of the right-starting winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, about Since 0.1 seconds x 1 time) is set to be extremely short compared to the staying time in the time-saving state (for example, about 4.8 seconds x 3 times), the second special symbol lottery is received in the normal game state. The opportunity per unit time is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. On the contrary, in the time-saving state such as the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the second special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery. ..

Therefore, the player wins a big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, the player plays with the aim of shifting to the probabilistic game state by allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state, the game is played with the aim of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 in the central portion of the game area in which the game ball flows down, and a game method (left-handed game) in which the game ball flows down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420. The method) and the game method (right-handed game method) in which the game ball flows down from the right side of the central structure 420 can be selectively performed. In the normal game state, the player plays the game by the left-handed game method, and in the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state, the player plays the game by the right-handed game method. The lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 are also arranged on the right side of the central structure 420, and the game is played by the right-handed gaming method even in the special gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the game ball can be caused to flow down through the left flow area 407 by launching the game ball with a strength to fly so as not to exceed the return ball prevention mechanism 404 but not the branch position P1. By launching the game ball with an intensity to fly so as to exceed the position P2, the game ball can be caused to flow down through the right flow area 408, and further, the strength to fly so as to exceed the branch position P1 but not the branch position P2. By launching the game ball with, the game ball can be flowed down through the middle flow down area 409. In addition, the flying game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B in the game by the left-handed game method in the normal game state, as in a general case. The amount of rotation of the launch handle 252 (see FIGS. 1 and 5) is adjusted so as to have a launch strength that facilitates launching. The game ball is launched by fixing the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 252 to the maximum rotation operation amount so that the launch strength of the game ball is maximized as in the case of the above. However, in the game with the right-handed game method in the special game state, unlike the general case, the game ball is launched at the maximum strength and the flight is performed so as to exceed the branch position P1 but not the branch position P2. In order to selectively launch the game ball with strength, the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 252 is appropriately switched to launch the game ball.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members and devices to the substrate 501. By connecting the substrate 501 and the intermediate block 103 by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, the rear block 104 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the intermediate block 103.

The rear block 104 continuously rectifies the game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing the game ball and the game ball on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 (for example, in one row) and arranges them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment part, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding part for guiding a game ball flowing in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball payout on the downstream side of the case rail 530. Guidance as a ball guiding unit that guides the payout device 540 that executes the rental of the game ball and the game ball that has flowed out from the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed on the base 501. The member 550, the payout control device 560 that controls the payout of the game ball and the lending of the game ball by the payout device 540, and the power supply that converts the external power into the power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices and outputs the power. A power supply / launch control device 570 and a payout control device 560 having a function as a means and a function as a launch control means for controlling the ejection of a game ball based on a launch operation to the launch operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920. It also includes a game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and a relay device 950 that relays a signal between a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100.

The substrate 501 is integrally molded with a resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 located behind the base portion 502. The upper portion of the base portion 502 is formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and the lower portion is formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and other devices can be attached to the base portion 502. It has a function as a mounted part to be attached.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. Further, the protective cover portion 503 does not have a shape that covers the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103 that needs to be frequently inspected and confirmed, such as a part of the main control device 370, is the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. It is set to a size that forms a window for exposure to. On the back surface of the protective cover portion 503, a large number of ventilation holes 503A having a function of improving heat dissipation in the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of an island facility are sequentially replenished to one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof. An opening (not shown) is formed in the game ball tank 510 on one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side on which the game ball is supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (front-back direction) as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). .. Further, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential in the game ball tank 510 and inside the game ball tank 510. The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows in through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 gradually increases in height as a passage forming member 521 forming a passage of a substantially gutter-shaped game ball having a width of passing in a row of the game balls and an upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. It is provided with a rectifying member 522 having a lower top surface portion and gradually rectifying a game ball flowing down the passage from a height that overlaps vertically to a height of one step. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

The case rail 530 is vertically elongated so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows into the case rail 530. The case rail 530 is continuous downward while being curved to the left and right so that the game ball does not flow vigorously. In addition, a ball breakage detection unit 539 for detecting ball breakage is provided in the middle of the ball passage in the case rail 530. The ball-out detection unit 539 has a built-in storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10), and the storage ball switch 591 causes ball clogging or the like on the case rail 530 or its upstream side, so that the game ball is placed in the case rail 530. Detects a ball out condition that is not normally replenished.

The payout device 540 includes a delivery mechanism for delivering the game ball, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a driving means for driving the delivery mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game ball stored in the ball passage is discharged to the downstream side. The passage of the released game ball through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payouts of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / emission control device 570 are attached so as to overlap the lower back surface of the base portion 502 of the base 501 so as to be located at the lower back side of the rear block 104. Has been done. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the payout control board 930, and the payout control board 930 does not leave a trace of opening like the main control board 920. It is housed inside a board case that is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

The power supply / launch control device 570 includes a power supply / launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case for accommodating the power supply / launch control board 900, and the power supply / launch control board 900 is the same as the main control board 920. It is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / emission control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. Note that in FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be described in detail individually.

The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies electric power of a predetermined voltage to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launch device according to the operation of the launch operation device 250. The launch control unit 902 that controls the drive of the 330, and the signal relay unit 903 that relays the setting display signal from the main control board 920, the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907, and the ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249. I have.

The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (for example, AC 24 volts) supplied from the outside and converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volts), and generates various electric powers from the internal power. The electric power generated by the power supply unit 901 is the electric power of the driving voltage (for example, 12 volt DC) for driving various devices such as solenoids and various motors, and drives various switches and executes control processing. It includes the power of the control voltage (for example, 5 volt DC) for the operation, the power of the backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various electric powers generated from the internal electric power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, internal power, drive voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the power supply monitoring board 910. Powers of a drive voltage, a control voltage, and a backup voltage are supplied to the main control board 920, and these powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the payout control board 930. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the sub-control board 940. Power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied to the emission control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903.

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in the off state, the intake of external power is stopped. By turning off the power switch 909 or disconnecting the power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 from the external power supply outlet (not shown), the pachinko machine can be used. A state in which the supply of electric power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external electric power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a "power failure state". The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. As a result, the main control board 920 can save the state and end the control so that it can return to the current control state.

The launch control unit 902 controls the drive of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 of the launch device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 are allowed to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected that the player is touching the launch handle 252 (see FIG. 1) based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the launch stop switch 255 for stopping the launch is On condition that it is not operated, the launch control unit 902 outputs a launch permission signal in the ON state to the main control board 920. Further, the main control board 920 outputs a launch solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the launch control unit 902 based on the launch permission signal and the launch abnormality signal. The launch control unit 902 operates the ball feed solenoid 332 based on the ball feed control signal in the on state, and operates the launch solenoid 334 based on the reception of the launch solenoid control signal in the on state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let me. As a result, the game balls are sequentially launched from the launching device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (rotation operation amount of the launching handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. In the main control board 920, the stored information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is initialized in response to the reception of the initialization signal in the ON state.

Further, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. The main control board 920 outputs a low-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 that receives the low-speed payout signal is the payout motor 542. The rotation speed (payout speed of the game ball from the payout device 540) will be reduced. On the contrary, the high-speed payout signal is output to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 that receives the high-speed payout signal speeds up the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. It will be.

The power supply monitoring board 910 transmits power supply and various signals between the power supply monitoring unit 911 that monitors the power supply status from the power supply / emission control board 900 and the power supply / emission control board 900 and the main control board 920. It includes a signal relay unit 912 to be relayed. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901. When the state where the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the power failure state is established, and the power failure signal in the ON state is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

The main control board 920 comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. The main control board 920 is equipped with an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU includes a CPU as an arithmetic processing unit (not shown), a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily when the control program is executed. It includes a RAM (not shown) for storing etc. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. There is.
The RAM of the main control board 920 has a configuration in which internal data can be maintained (backed up) by supplying power of the backup voltage from the power supply / emission control board 900 even after the transition to the power failure state.

The payout control board 930 controls a game ball payout operation by the payout device 540 in response to an instruction from the main control board 920 and a game ball lending operation by the payout device 540 in response to an operation of the game ball lending device 290. Similar to the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted. The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information communication is possible. For example, bidirectional information input / output communication is possible between the main control board 920 and the relay device 950. The open / close detection switch 108, 109, the storage ball switch 591, and the payout counting switch 592 are connected to each other so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is connected to one-way information only. Only output communication is possible. The RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function capable of maintaining internal data for a certain period of time in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920. Unlike this, the internal data may not be maintained in a power failure state.

The sub control board 940 controls the operation of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various sound devices, and the like based on the instructions from the main control board 920. The sub-control board 940 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information can be communicated. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , It is connected to the input operation device 260 so as to be capable of information communication in both directions, and is connected to the decorative symbol display device 479 and the like so as to be able to perform information output communication only in one direction.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing on the main control board 920 is roughly divided into the main processing that is started when the power is restored from a power failure state and the main processing that is periodically (in this embodiment, at a 2 ms (millisecond) cycle) interrupted and executed. It consists of timer interrupt processing.

First, the main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 11).

In the main process of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processes (program start process S1001 to random number initial setting process S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information are executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 that prohibits the interrupt, the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), and the normal symbol related to the special symbol are used. The random number initial value update process S1021 that updates the value of the winning random number initial value counter (a part of the area of the RAM), and the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type for determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The variable counter update process S1022 for updating the value of the counter (a part of the area of the RAM) and the interrupt permission process S1023 for permitting an interrupt are repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt enable process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt enable process S1023.

In a series of control start processes, a program start process S1001 that sets an initial value in a stack pointer (a part of RAM area) that controls program execution, an interrupt mode setting process S1002 that sets an interrupt mode, and a payout control board. The start-up standby process S1003, which waits for a predetermined time until the 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like start up, is executed.

After the start-up standby process S1003, the output state determination process S1004 of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power supply / emission control board 900, the value determination process S1005 of the power failure information (a part of the RAM), and the storage. The information storage state determination process S1007 is performed, and based on these determination results, it is determined whether or not to erase the information in substantially the entire area of the RAM.

The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, the checksum value for the storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation process S1006), and the current checksum value and the power failure monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) are accompanied by the transition to the previous power failure state. ) Is determined whether or not the exclusive OR with the RAM determination value, which is the two's complement of the checksum value calculated in), is “0” (determination process S1007), whereby the current checksum value and the current checksum value are determined. It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

When the initialization signal is on (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not a predetermined power failure value indicating that the saved information has been saved and terminated at the time of transition to the power failure state (S1005: N), or saved. When the information is not normally held (S1007: N), the RAM clear process S1008 that erases the information in substantially the entire area of the RAM is executed. Hardware that initializes various devices connected to the main control board 920 after it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y) or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed. The hardware initialization process S1009 is executed.

After the hardware initialization process S1009, the determination process S1010 for determining whether or not the power failure information is the power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010: N), the RAM recovery setting process S1011 that initially sets various information including the recovery of the retained information and the recovery command indicating the completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By restoring the holding information in the RAM restoration setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is restored to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010: Y), various information is initialized (RAM initial setting process S1013) without restoring the retained information, and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output process S1014).

In the RAM recovery setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as an error detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state are performed. Even if is occurring, all those error states are cleared. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command are received. A predetermined initialization process will be executed in each of the above.

After the initial setting of the RAM according to the situation at the time of startup (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014), if the condition device is operating at the time of the previous transition to the power failure state, the special gaming state is set. Preparations for returning are performed (special game state return preparation process S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operating state of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is determined, and the process corresponding to the game situation in the power failure state is executed on the sub-control board 940. To.

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the time saving state or the non-time saving state is set by determining whether or not the time saving state flag is set (determination process S1016), and the time saving state is set. In the case (S1016: Y), the time saving command is output (time saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, in the non-time saving state (S1016: N), the non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output process S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (a part of the area of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initialization process S1019).

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

In the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 920, first, the interrupt start processing S1201 for starting the timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. After that, the power failure monitoring process S1202 to the external information output process S1221 related to the substantial control of the pachinko machine 100 are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various frauds (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, the interrupt enable process S1222 that permits the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. Hereinafter, various main processes will be described individually.

In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (a part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the on state is detected three times, the power failure state is determined. If it is not determined in this determination that there is a power failure, the power failure information is maintained at the energized value.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the power failure monitoring process S1202 that the power is in a power failure state, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM return setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Further, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and the 2's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop in which substantially no processing is performed, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is held based on the backup power. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the special symbol is changed. When the value of the winning random number counter related to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the changed value is the same as the circular initial value for the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. Is set to the value of, and the circulation initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a unique value is set for each counter, and multiple counters are updated asynchronously, and the circulation initial value for each counter is set. Refers to the initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol have the same value range, and the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range. The range of values is the same for the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, which is special. When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). Regarding the symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol, the winning random number initial value related to the special symbol is also provided except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. It is updated in the same way as for the value counter.

In the fluctuation counter update process S1205, the values of the first fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter for determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first fluctuation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), the value is changed to a value "1" larger than the current value, and the first fluctuation If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second fluctuation type counter to the fourth fluctuation type counter are also updated in the same manner as in the case of the first fluctuation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique to those counters. Will be done.

The winning random number counters, jackpot symbol random number counters, stop pattern selection counters, and variable type counters related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol do not necessarily have the above-mentioned configurations, and at least a part of the above counters has other configurations. For example, it may be configured to update from a constant initial value without using the initial value counter, or it may be configured by a random number generation IC without using a program and the value may be referred to as needed. ..

In the game stop determination process S1206, when the fraud detection information is a fraud detection value, the fraud detection information is updated to the game stop value, and various information for stopping the game progress is set. On the other hand, if the fraud detection information is not a fraud detection value or is already a game stop value, the game stop determination process S1206 ends without substantially executing the process. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when the occurrence of various frauds is detected in the fraud detection process S1211. Further, in the determination process S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol related to the ordinary symbol are used based on the control data stored in the output buffer. A signal for controlling various notification devices such as the display device 473 is output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approach restricting solenoid 462, a lower approach restricting solenoid 463, an upper approach restricting solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are used. The control signal is output.

In the switch reading process S1209, the middle start winning switch 441A, 441B, the right starting winning switch 442, the lower winning winning switch 443, the upper winning winning switch 444, the combined operation switch 445, the starting switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, the specific The signal states from each of the passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A and 449B are read, and changes in the detection state of the game ball by various switches are detected.

Specifically, in the switch read process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a part of the area of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. The signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as "first signal state") and the signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as "second signal state"). , Changes in the detection status of various switches are detected based on the detection status detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "previous detection status"). Then, for each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, when the first signal state is the on state and the second signal state is the on state, it is determined that the switch is in the on state transition. Then, the detection flag (a part of the area of RAM) according to the type of the switch is set. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the various switches are turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined areas of RAM) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each game state, fraud monitoring, and the like are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, fraudulent acts such as forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices are detected. Specifically, the right-starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, and the upper winning device 434 are moved to the forced entry allowable posture, and the game ball is guided to the specific passage of the lower winning device 433 by vibration. , Right-starting winning device 432 by radio waves, Inducing forced malfunction of lower-ranking winning device 433 and upper-ranking winning device 434, guiding game balls to various winning devices by magnetic adsorption, upper middle-starting winning device 431A, There is a high possibility that fraudulent acts such as guiding a game ball to the lower middle start winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower grand winning device 433, and the upper grand winning device 434 at an abnormal timing have been performed. Detect the occurrence.

In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on the detection of the game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the lower middle starting winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). The middle start winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. Further, when the right start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right starting winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the lower prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower prize switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the upper prize switch 444 (see FIG. 10) detects the game ball. When the upper prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the above, the grand prize counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) and the second payout counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) are updated.

In the launch control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the launch solenoid 334 that drives the launch mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, an intermediate block is provided with respect to the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930. Whether or not 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed is detected. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) with respect to the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). 3) is detected whether or not it is closed.

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, the information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands according to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to execute notifications according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, and are output to the payout control board 930, if necessary. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is added by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and is subtracted by 1 each time a prize ball command based on the winning is set. In the payout control board 930, the main control board 920 is awarded each time the control for paying out the number (for example, 3) of the game balls corresponding to the winning is executed (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed). In the situation where the ball command is requested and the prize balls are continuously paid out, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a prize (for example, 13 pieces) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter is issued on the payout control board. When the 930 receives the game, the payout control board 930 executes a control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol-related process S1217, the holding control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower prize winning device The operation control of 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the special symbol-related processing S1217, the holding control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the lower prize winning device The operation control of 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 is further executed.

In the normal symbol-related process S1218, the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. ..

In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol, and the special symbol related process S1217. Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 and the like related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The synthesized output data will be output to each device in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Flowing mode of the game ball>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the flow-down mode of the game ball in the game area will be described. FIG. 13 is a partially enlarged front view of the upper side of the game board 400, and FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged front view of the right side of the game board 400. Note that FIG. 7 is also referred to as necessary.

In the game board 400, as shown in FIG. 7, a game area generally divided by an outer rail 402 and an inner rail 403 is formed, and in the game area, various structures such as the central structure 420 and the lower part are formed. Various devices such as the grand prize device 433 and the upper grand prize device 434 are provided. The flight of the game ball in the game area is determined by the launch strength when launched from the launching device 330 and the shape of the outer rail 402. Here, "flying of the game ball" means the movement of the game ball beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 until it comes into contact with a member other than the outer rail 402. The launch strength of the game ball launched from the launch device 330 is proportional to the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 252 (see FIGS. 1 and 5) of the launch operation device 250, and the maximum rotation operation amount of the launch handle 252 is approximately 120 °. Is. When the launch handle 252 is rotated by the player, the game ball is launched from the launcher 330 at intervals of approximately 0.6 seconds. Even when the launch handle 252 is rotated by the player, when the launch stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) is pressed, the launch of the game ball is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 7, the inclination of the arcuate portion of the outer rail 402 that determines the upper boundary of the game area (the inclination of the tangent line of the outer rail 402 with respect to the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100) is the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The inclination is approximately 50 degrees to the right in the vicinity of the arrangement of the anti-jump member 405, and the inclination is approximately 45 degrees to the right in the vicinity of the anti-jump member 405. The game ball launched from the launching device 330 at the maximum strength flies along the arcuate portion of the outer rail 402. In the following, the flight trajectory of the game ball launched with the maximum strength will be referred to as the "maximum flight trajectory".

At the upper part of the central structure 420, as shown in FIG. 13, the branch position P1 facing the portion which is the maximum height position of the central structure 420 and the inclination of the outer rail 402 is approximately 5 degrees upward to the right. Therefore, a left wall portion 421 that descends to the left is formed. The branch position P1 is the maximum width from the left end T1 of the game area based on the maximum width W (see FIG. 7) between the left end T1 (see FIG. 7) and the right end T2 (see FIG. 7) of the game area. It is located on the center side by a width of about 45% of W.

A game ball launched with a strength that exceeds the return ball prevention mechanism 404 but does not exceed the branch position P1 (approximately 20% or more and less than 45% of the maximum strength) is more than the portion of the outer rail 402 facing the branch position P1. It separates from the maximum flight trajectory in front of it, collides with the nail 411 and the left wall portion 421, and flows down the left flow-down region 407 formed on the left outer edge side of the central structure 420.

Further, on the upper part of the central structure 420, a right wall portion 422 that descends to the right by approximately 40 degrees from the branch position P2 that faces the portion where the inclination of the outer rail 402 is 40 degrees that descends to the right is formed. The branch position P2 is located on the right side by a width of approximately 80% of the maximum width W from the left end T1 of the game area, based on the maximum width W of the game area. The game ball launched with a strength exceeding the branch position P2 (75% or more of the maximum strength) flows down the right flow area 408. As shown in FIG. 14, the right flow area 408 is formed by a region for guiding the game ball to the branch passage 408A by the right wall portion 422, the branch passage 408A, and the curved passage 408B.

Specifically, the game ball launched with the maximum strength flies along the maximum flight trajectory, collides with the recoil prevention member 405, and starts the flow of the right flow region 408. In addition, a game ball launched in a predetermined intensity range weaker than the maximum intensity (a range of 80% or more of the maximum intensity and less than the maximum intensity) goes into the maximum flight trajectory at a slower speed than when launched at the maximum intensity. It flies along the recoil prevention member 405 and starts the flow in the right flow area 408. The game ball that collides with the recoil prevention member 405 is then formed on the right outer edge side of the central structure 420, and is lowered through a branch passage 408A in which the intermediate portion branches into two and a curved passage 408B communicating with the branch passage 408A. It is guided above the grand prize device 433 and the upper prize device 434. Further, the game ball launched in a weaker predetermined strength range (75% or more of the maximum strength and less than 80% of the maximum strength) deviates from the maximum flight trajectory on the way and collides with the right wall portion 422 to the right. The flow in the flow area 408 is started. The game ball that collides with the right wall portion 422 then rebounds toward the recoil prevention member 405, collides with the recoil prevention member 405, and enters the branch passage 408A.

Further, the upper part of the central structure 420 is curved downward from the right end (branch position P1) of the left wall portion 421 between the left wall portion 421 and the right wall portion 422, and the left end of the right wall portion 422 (branch position P1). A median wall portion 423 extending to the lower part of the branch position P2) is formed. Further, at the right end of the central structure 420, a guide passage 424 for smoothly guiding the game ball is formed. The step portion between the right end of the middle wall portion 423 and the left end of the right wall portion 422 is the entrance 424A to the guide passage 424, and the game ball that has entered the entrance 424A is on the upper left side of the upper prize winning device 434. It is discharged from the formed discharge port 424B. The midstream down region 409 is formed by the region for guiding the game ball to the guide passage 424 by the middle wall portion 423 and the guide passage 424.

A game ball launched in a predetermined strength range (a range of 45% or more of the maximum strength and less than 75% of the maximum strength) deviates from the maximum flight trajectory on the way and collides with the middle wall portion 423, and in the midstream down region 409. Start the flow. After that, the game ball that collides with the middle wall portion 423 rebounds slightly, but is smoothly guided to the entrance 424A of the guide passage 424 along the middle wall portion 423. The middle wall portion 423 has a shape in which the inclination becomes steeper as the distance from the branch position P1 to the right side, and the game ball collides with the middle wall portion 423 at any position of the middle wall portion 423 at a thin angle. It can only recoil and can recoil toward the entrance 424A. Further, the guide passage 424 has a shape that bends in multiple stages in a plane along the surface 401 of the base of the game board 400, and the game ball is smoothly guided from the entrance 424A to the discharge port 424B also in the guide passage 424. ..

The shape of the guide passage 424 is such that the time when the game ball reaches the upper prize winning device 434 through the middle flow lower region 409 after being launched with a predetermined strength that exceeds the branch position P1 but does not exceed the branch position P2 is the game ball. Is launched at maximum intensity and then reaches the upper prize winning device 434 through the right flow area 408, which is longer than the time corresponding to the shortest firing interval by the launching device 330 (for example, 0.6 seconds). It is adjusted so that. The upper prize-winning device 434 and the lower prize-winning device 433 are arranged one above the other in close proximity to each other, and since there is no member between them that changes the flow of the game ball, the middle flow lower region 409 is used. The time difference between the case of entering the lower prize winning device 433 and the case of entering the lower prize winning device 433 through the right flow down area 408 is substantially the same as the case of entering the lower prize winning device 434. The time for reaching the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 through the middle flow lower area 409 and the time for reaching the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 through the right flow down area 408 are , The time corresponding to the mode in the frequency distribution based on a large number of trials, the average time based on the frequency distribution, the weighted average time based on the frequency distribution, and the like can be adopted.

Here, the operation of the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 and the behavior of the game ball in them will be described.

When a big hit is won by the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the mode of the special gaming state is determined, and the mode shifts to the special gaming state of the determined mode. Specifically, it is a short-term (6 rounds in this embodiment) special gaming state in which the number of continuous rounds is small, or a long-term (16 rounds in this embodiment) special gaming state in which the number of continuous rounds is large. In each round of the special game state, when the maximum permissible time for entry (29.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, or when the specified number of game balls (8 balls in this embodiment) has passed, the upper prize winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10). ) Or the lower prize winning switch 443 (see FIGS. 10 and 14), the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 change from the entry allowed state to the entry prohibited state. Normally, when a specified number of game balls are detected by the upper prize winning switch 444 and the lower prize winning switch 443, the entry allowed state is changed to the entry prohibited state.

Here, the behavior of the game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 434 and its detection will be described. In the entry allowable state of the upper prize winning device 434, the upper entry control mechanism 454 (see FIG. 7; omitted in FIG. 14) is inclined so that the upper end portion protrudes forward, and the diameter of the game ball is approximately 5 A game ball can enter through the double-width entrance 434A. The game ball that has reached the upper prize winning device 434 is guided to the back by the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 and enters the entrance 434A. Inside the upper prize winning device 434, there is a back guide passage 434B that is formed slightly to the center from the right end and guides the game ball to the back, and a left slope that slopes downward to the left of the back guide passage 434B. A passage portion 434C and a right-side inclined passage portion 434D that inclines downward to the left on the right side of the inner guide passage portion 434B are formed. The upper prize switch 444 for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 434 is provided in the wife guide passage portion 434B, and the game ball that has entered the upper prize guide passage portion 434 is passed through the wife guide passage portion 434B. It is detected after being guided to the back of the left inclined passage portion 434C and the right inclined passage portion 434D.

The main approach route of the game ball that enters the upper prize winning device 434 through the right flow down region 408 is the route E1 that passes through the left side of the right starting winning device 432 and enters approximately the center of the entrance 434A. The game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 434 through this path E1 is greatly accelerated in the left inclined passage portion 434C because the moving distance along the left inclined passage portion 434C from the approach position to the inner guide passage portion 434B is short. There is no such thing. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 434 through the route E1 once exceeds the back guide passage portion 434B, moves to the right inclined passage portion 434D, and then returns to the back guide passage portion 434B. There is almost no reciprocating motion in the left-right direction in the front, and the vehicle enters the inner guide passage portion 434B almost smoothly. When the game ball enters the upper prize winning device 434 through the right flow area 408, the time from when the game ball reaches the upper entrance regulation mechanism 454 until it is detected by the upper prize switch 444 is about 0.2 seconds. .. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously launched so as to flow down the right flow area 408, the shortest launch interval for launching the game ball from the launching device 330 is approximately 0.6 seconds, so that the preceding game ball is a nail or the like. Unless it accidentally flows down significantly slower due to interference with, or the subsequent game ball accidentally flows down significantly faster, the preceding game ball reaches the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 and then wins the upper prize. The subsequent game ball does not reach the upper entry restricting mechanism 454 until it is detected by the switch 444.

On the other hand, the main approach path of the game ball entering the upper prize winning device 434 through the middle flow down area 409 is on the left side of the case of passing through the right flow down area 408, and the path E2 entering near the left end of the entrance 434A. Is. Although the game ball that has entered the upper prize winning device 434 through this route E2 rarely smoothly enters the back guide passage portion 434B, it reciprocates left and right in front of the back guide passage portion 434B and then guides the wife. Enter the passage 434B. As a result, the time from when the game ball reaches the upper entry control mechanism 454 until it is detected by the upper prize winning switch 444 is longer than when the game ball reaches the upper prize winning device 434 through the right flow down area 408. Because the distance guided inside the device 434 is long, and because it reciprocates left and right in front of the wife guidance passage 434B and then enters the wife guidance passage 434B, it becomes long, and it takes about 0.4 seconds. is there. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously launched so as to flow down the middle flow down region 409, the shortest launch interval for launching the game ball from the launching device 330 is 0.6 seconds, so that the preceding game ball is restricted from entering upward. The subsequent game ball does not reach the upper entry control mechanism 454 between the time when it reaches the mechanism 454 and the time when it is detected by the upper prize winning switch 444. The time from when the game ball enters the upper entry control mechanism 454 until it is detected by the upper prize winning switch 444 is longer than when the game ball is continuously launched so as to flow down the right side of the central structure 420. However, in order for the guide passage 424 to smoothly guide the game ball, the preceding game ball accidentally flows down significantly slower than when the game ball continues to flow down on the right side of the central structure 420. Or, it is less likely that the subsequent game ball will flow down significantly faster.

The behavior of the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 and its detection will be described. In the entry allowed state of the lower prize winning device 433, the lower entry control mechanism 453 is immersed in the rear side, and the game ball can enter through the entrance 433A having a width approximately 5 times the diameter of the game ball. Inside the lower prize winning device 433, a central inclined passage portion 433B that guides the game ball to the lower prize winning switch 443 and is inclined downward to the left, and a central inclined passage portion 433B that is formed on the upper left side of the central inclined passage portion 433B and is inclined downward to the right. A left inclined passage portion 434C and a right inclined passage portion 434D formed on the right side of the central inclined passage portion 433B and inclined downward to the left are formed.

The main approach route of the game ball entering the lower prize winning device 433 through the right flow area 408 is the route E3. The game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 through this path E3 directly enters the central inclined passage portion 433B, is guided to the left along the central inclined passage portion 433B, and is detected by the lower prize winning switch 443. .. The time from when the game ball passes through the lower entry control mechanism 453 to when it is detected by the lower prize winning switch 443 is about 0.2 seconds.

On the other hand, the main approach route of the game ball entering the lower prize winning device 433 through the middle flow lower region 409 is the route E4. The game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 through the route E4 is once guided to the right end side of the central inclined passage portion 433B by the left inclined passage portion 433C, and then guided to the left along the central inclined passage portion 433B. Detected by the lower prize switch 443. In this case, since the distance traveled from entering the lower grand prize device 433 to reaching the lower grand prize switch 443 is longer than when reaching the lower grand prize device 433 through the right flow area 408, the game ball. The time from passing through the lower entry control mechanism 453 to being detected by the lower prize winning switch 443 becomes longer, about 0.4 seconds. Even if the game ball is continuously launched so as to flow down the right flow down area 408, or even if the game ball is continuously launched so as to flow down the middle flow down area 409, the shortest time to launch the game ball from the launching device 330. Since the firing interval is approximately 0.6 seconds, the succeeding game ball is restricted from entering the lower entry between the time when the preceding game ball passes through the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 and the time when the preceding game ball is detected by the lower prize winning switch 443. It does not pass through the mechanism 453.

<Game procedure in special game state>
Next, the game procedure in the special game state will be described. In the entry allowable state of each round of the upper prize device 434 and the lower prize device 433, the game ball with the maximum strength is allowed to enter the upper prize device 434 and the lower prize device 433 through the right flow down area 408. Launch. In order to allow the game ball to flow down to the right flow area 408, as described above, the ball may be launched with an intensity of 75% or more of the maximum intensity, but even if a predetermined intensity is selected from those intensity ranges, the game is played. Since the flow mode of the sphere hardly changes, there is no need to launch it with an intensity other than the maximum intensity.

Further, in the entry allowed state of each round of the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433, the decorative symbol display device 479 arranged substantially in the center of the central structure 420 is provided with the effect during the special gaming state. , The number of remaining game balls up to the specified number (remaining number of waiting for entry) and the remaining time in the allowed entry state (allowable remaining time for entry) are notified. In addition, information that assists the optimal game progress is appropriately notified.

While monitoring the remaining number of waiting for entry and the allowable approach time, the player launches the game ball at the maximum strength to allow the game ball to flow down through the right flow down area 408, and launches the game ball through the middle flow down area 409 with a weaker strength. It will be timed to change to launch so that it will flow down.

The specific game progress will be described below. When the special game state is started, the decorative symbol display device 479 notifies the information indicating that the launch handle 252 is rotated by the maximum rotation operation amount and the game ball is flowed down through the right flow area 408. Furthermore, if the launching handle 252 is properly operated to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball at the time of launching to allow the last game ball of the specified number to enter the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433, a privilege is received. You will be informed that there is a possibility of being affected. Specifically, in order to receive the privilege, the game balls are allowed to enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 until the number of remaining balls reaches the specified number, and then the balls are allowed to flow down through the middle flow lower region 409. It is necessary to reduce the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 252 to launch the game ball, and then return the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 252 to the maximum rotation operation amount and launch the game ball so as to flow down through the right flow area 408. Is notified.

The player rotates the launch handle 252 at the maximum rotation amount and starts launching the game ball. First, a game ball that is one less than the specified number is launched, and the launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped. If at least one of the launched game balls does not enter the upper prize-winning device 434 or the lower prize-winning device 433, additional game balls are launched by the number of balls that did not enter. Repeating such launches as necessary until the game balls, which are one less than the specified number, enter the upper prize-winning device 434 or the lower prize-winning device 433, that is, the number of waiting entries becomes "1". This launch is repeated until.

When the number of waiting for entry becomes "1", the rotation of the launch handle 252 so that the next game ball flows down through the middle flow down region 409 so that it is 50% or more and less than 75% of the maximum rotation operation amount. The operation amount is adjusted to launch the game ball, and the game ball is launched so that the next game ball continuously flows down through the right flow area 408. In the decorative symbol display device 479, when the number of waiting for entry is "1" and the allowable remaining time for entry is less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the above-mentioned anomaly Notify that a normal launch is performed without performing a target launch. This is to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which both of the two game balls cannot be reached while the upper prize-winning device 434 and the lower prize-winning device 433 are in the admissible state when the ball is launched irregularly. Is.

Both the game ball launched in this way and flowing down through the middle flow down area 409 and the game ball flowing down through the right flow down area 408 will enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 with high probability. ..

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100, when the game ball is launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down area 409, and the game ball launched following the game ball at the shortest firing interval is launched so as to flow down through the right flow down area 408. , These game balls reach the upper prize-winning device 434 and the lower prize-winning device 433 at almost the same time with high probability. Therefore, when the number of game balls that have entered the upper prize-winning device 434 or the lower prize-winning device 433 is one more than the specified number, if the launch adjustment as described above is performed, both of the launched game balls can be obtained. It is possible to enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 with high probability. This makes it possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the special game state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, the player can enjoy benefits such as an increase in the number of prize balls by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the predetermined firing handle (adjusting the firing intensity of the game balls).

Further, in the launch adjustment as described above, it is necessary for the player to switch the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 252, and a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 in the special gaming state. The monotony of the game when it is made to play is reduced, and the playability in the special game state is improved. Further, before the launch adjustment as described above, in order to adjust the number of game balls entering the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433, it is necessary to temporarily stop the launch of the game balls. In addition, it is necessary to monitor the remaining opening time of the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433, and a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 in the special gaming state. The monotony of the game when making it is reduced. As a result, the playability of the special gaming state is further improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the preceding game ball launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down area 409 passes through a longer path than the subsequent game ball launched so as to flow down through the right flow down area 408. Since the shape of the guide passage is designed to reach the winning device 434 and the lower large winning device 433, the game ball flowing down through the middle flow down area 409 and the game ball flowing down through the right flow down area 408 are almost simultaneously. It is possible to enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the game ball launched so as to flow down through the middle flow area 409 is substantially the same as the shortest firing interval time as compared with the game ball launched so as to flow down through the right flow area 408. Since the shape of the guide passage is designed so as to reach the upper prize-winning device 434 and the lower prize-winning device 433 later than the time required for, the amount of rotation of the launch handle can be reduced without stopping the launch of the game ball. If changed, those game balls can reach the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 almost at the same time. As a result, after launching the game ball so as to flow down through the middle flow down area 409, the launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped, the flow state of the game ball is judged, and the next game ball passes through the right flow down area 408. Compared to the case of restarting the launch so as to flow down, the game ball launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down area 409 and the game ball launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down area 409 can be easily increased. It is possible to reach the vicinity of the winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the game ball launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down region 409 is guided to the entrance 424A of the guide passage 424 almost smoothly regardless of the position of the middle wall portion 423. Then, it is smoothly guided to the discharge port 424B through the guide passage 424. Further, the game ball released from the discharge port 424B is smoothly guided to the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 with a predetermined probability because the discharge port 424B is formed in the vicinity of the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433. To. As a result, the game ball launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down area 409 passes through a longer route than the game ball launched so as to flow down through the right flow down area 408, and the upper grand prize device 434 and the lower grand prize. Although it reaches the device 433, the time lag between the launch from the launching device 330 and the arrival at the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 can be reduced, and the game ball flowing down through the middle flow down region 409 and the right It is possible to allow the game ball flowing down through the flow down area 408 to enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 almost at the same time.

Further, in order to change the launch so as to flow down through the middle flow down region 409 and then to flow down through the right flow down region 408, the opposite configuration, that is, to flow down through the middle flow down region 409 was launched. A guide passage so that the game ball reaches the upper prize-winning device 434 and the lower prize-winning device 433 about the same time as the shortest firing interval time compared to the game ball launched so as to flow down through the right flow area 408. In the case where the shape of is designed, it is surely launched in advance as compared with the configuration in which the launch is changed so as to flow down through the right flow down region 408 and then flow down through the middle flow down region 409. The game ball can be made to flow down through the middle flow down area 409, and the game ball to be launched subsequently can be made to flow down through the right flow down area 408. This means that the launch handle 252 may be rotated to the maximum when the game ball is allowed to flow down through the right flow area 408, but the launch handle 252 is rotated when the game ball is caused to flow down through the middle flow area 409. It is necessary to appropriately adjust the operation amount to an intermediate rotation operation amount, and if the adjustment is incorrect, the game ball is moved through the left flow down area 407 even though the game ball is allowed to flow down through the middle flow down area 409. This is because the game ball may be caused to flow down or the game ball may be caused to flow down through the right flow area 408.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, since the operation necessary for enjoying the privilege and the timing of the operation are notified, it is possible to give all the players an opportunity to obtain the privilege, and it is specific. It is possible to prevent the privilege from being given only to the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the main path and portion of the game ball launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down region 409 to enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 flow down through the right flow down region 408. Since the game balls launched in this way are different from the main routes and parts that enter the upper-ranking prize device 434 and the lower-ranking prize-winning device 433, those gaming balls are almost simultaneously moved to the upper-ranking prize-winning device 434 and the lower-ranking winning device 433. Even if they reach the vicinity of, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming balls interfere with each other and do not enter the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 at almost the same time.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the time difference for each game ball until the pachinko machine 100 flows down through the middle flow down region 409 and reaches the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433, particularly the time delayed from the average time. The time difference for each game ball until it flows down through the right flow area 408 and reaches the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433, in particular, is configured to be smaller than the time lagging behind the average time. It is configured so that the time from entering the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 through the middle flow lower region 409 to being detected by the upper prize switch 444 or the lower prize switch 443 becomes longer. There is. As a result, even if it takes a little longer for the game ball flowing down through the right flow down area 408 to reach the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433, the game ball flows down through the middle flow down area 409. Before the game ball is detected by the upper grand prize switch 444 and the lower grand prize switch 443 and the upper grand prize device 434 and the lower grand prize device 433 change to the entry prohibited state, the upper grand prize device 434 and the lower grand prize device 434 and the lower grand prize device It can be entered into 433.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, the player adjusts the amount of rotation of the launch handle 252, that is, the launch strength (launch strength) of the game ball is adjusted to exceed the specified number of game balls in the special gaming state. Was configured to be able to enter the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433.

Instead of this, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment, the launch handle 252 by the player is attached to the upper right start winning device 731 provided at a position where the gaming ball launched at a constant rate of fire cannot enter. It is configured so that the game ball can enter by adjusting the amount of rotation operation. Then, by allowing the game ball to enter the upper right start winning device 731 under a predetermined condition, the variation display of the unit game is performed in a predetermined variation time in the advantageous variation state which is the gaming state after the special gaming state. Is executed. In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 16, the structural configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged front view of the right side of the game board 400 in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment.

Note that FIG. 16 shows a schematic outline of the main structures provided in the game area. Further, in the drawing of FIG. 16, in order to facilitate understanding, the position of the specific passage QA formed inside the lower prize winning device 433 is indicated by the letter “V” and the non-specific passage QB. The position of is indicated by the letter "N". Further, in FIG. 16, a distribution mechanism for distributing the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 to the specific passage QA or the non-specific passage QB is illustrated, and the distribution mechanism is numbered “601”. , A part of the flowing game ball is shown for reference.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, an upper right start winning device 731 is provided on the right side of the game board 400 instead of the combination operating device 435. The upper right start winning device 731 is a starting device according to the first special symbol, similar to the upper middle starting winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B. The entrance portion of the game ball in the upper right start winning device 731 constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball entering the winning opening is a through hole formed in the base 401 like each winning device such as the right starting winning device 432. It is guided through a recovery / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the substrate 401.

The game board 400 is provided with an upper right start winning switch that detects a game ball that has entered the upper right starting winning device 731. The upper right start winning switch is connected to the main control board 920 like the switches such as the middle starting winning switches 441A and 441B. Hereinafter, the upper right start winning switch for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper right starting winning device 731 will be described as "upper right starting winning switch 741" for convenience. When the upper right start winning switch 741 detects the game ball that has entered the upper right start winning device 731, it is the same as when the middle start winning switch 441A, 441B detects the game ball that has entered the middle start winning devices 431A, 431B. It will be the start prize of the first special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol can be reserved up to once. On the other hand, the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is configured to be holdable up to four times as in the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the flow-down mode of the game ball in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, a guide passage 711 is formed between the upper edge side of the central structure 420 and the outer rail 402. The game ball launched from the launching device 330 enters the guide passage 711 and passes through the guide passage 711, so that the game ball is guided to the game area on the right side provided with the upper right start winning device 731 or the like.

Therefore, the game launched (launched) from the launching device 330 with a firing intensity capable of entering the guide passage 711 (that is, a firing intensity stronger than the firing intensity range for allowing the game ball to enter the left flow area 407). The ball enters the guide passage 711. The intensity range of the firing intensity that can enter the guide passage 711 is, for example, 45% or more of the maximum firing intensity.

In the guide passage 711, a right flow down area 708 and a middle flow down area 709 are continuously provided. The game ball that has passed through the guide passage 711 enters the entrance 708A of the right flow down area 708 or the entrance 709A of the middle flow down area 709. The game ball that has entered the entrance 708A flows down the right flow down area 708 through the path E5, and the game ball that has entered the entrance 709A flows down the middle flow down area 709 through the path E6.

Of the inlet 708A and the inlet 709A, the inlet 708A is located on the side farther from the center than the inlet 709A (that is, the side farther from the return ball prevention mechanism 404). By launching the game ball from the launching device 330 in a predetermined first intensity range including the maximum firing intensity (for example, an intensity range of 75% or more of the maximum firing intensity), the game ball is inserted into the entrance 708A. It is possible to enter the right flow area 708 from.

On the other hand, among the intensity ranges of the firing intensity that can enter the guide passage 711, the firing is performed in a predetermined second intensity range weaker than the first intensity range (for example, a range of 45% or more of the maximum intensity and less than 75% of the maximum intensity). By launching the game ball from the device 330, the game ball can be made to enter the midstream down region 709 from the entrance 709A.

Therefore, the player rotates the launch handle 252 with a predetermined first operation amount (first rotation operation amount) so that the launch intensity of the game ball falls within the first intensity range, so that the game ball flows down to the right. By rotating the launch handle 252 with a predetermined second operation amount (second rotation operation amount) so that the area 708 can be entered and the launch intensity of the game ball is in the second intensity range, the game ball Can enter the midstream down region 709. That is, by adjusting the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252, the player can let the game ball flow down in the flow-down area intended by himself / herself in the right flow-down area 708 or the middle flow-down area 709.

The game ball flowing down the right flow area 708 or the middle flow area 709 is a path when the game balls flowing down the respective flow areas 708 and 709 are not interfered by other game balls in the confluence area 710 where they can enter. It can flow downstream through E7. The game ball flowing down through the path E7 can enter the starter 436, the right start winning device 432, the upper prize winning device 434, or the lower prize winning device 433.

On the other hand, when a game ball (for example, a game ball P1) flowing down the right flow area 708 comes into contact with a game ball (for example, a game ball P2) flowing down the middle flow area 708 in the confluence area 710, the latter game ball causes The former game ball that has been flipped can flow down to the downstream side through the path E8. When the game ball passes through the path E8, the game ball enters the upper right start winning device 731.

In the right-flowing area 708 and the middle-flowing area 709, respectively, after the game ball enters the middle-flowing area 709 from the inlet 709A, the game ball continuously launched from the launching device 330 flows down to the right from the inlet 708A. When entering the region 708, the game ball flowing down the right flow down region 708 is configured to have a length that can come into contact with the game ball flowing down the middle flow down region 708 at the confluence region 710.

Therefore, the player launches the game ball from the launching device 330 with the firing intensity in the second intensity range, and then launches the subsequent game ball from the launching device 330 with the launching intensity in the first intensity range in succession to the game ball. As a result, the game ball can enter (win) the upper right start winning device 731. That is, the entry of the game ball into the upper right start winning device 731 is possible by the player intentionally adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 252 as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the progress of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on and the game is started, as shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 100 is first started from the normal game state. In the normal game state, the player generates the right of the unit game by the starting prize and executes the game in anticipation of winning a big hit. When the right to the unit game is generated by the start prize, the special symbol (specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and the confirmation is stopped, and the unit game related to the special symbol is won the big hit lottery. Then, the game state shifts to the special game state. The determination of whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won is executed as a part of the special symbol-related process S1217 (see FIG. 12) that controls the unit game related to the special symbol.

In the special gaming state, for example, the large prize device (specifically, the lower prize device 433 and the upper prize device 434) for about 30 seconds operates a predetermined number of times (specifically, five times). In the special game state, when the large winning devices 433 and 434 are operated a predetermined number of times, the maximum number of unit games that can be executed in the advantageous fluctuation state (specifically, 3 times) is set as the number of remaining unit games. It is set and the game state shifts to the advantageous fluctuation state. Here, the advantageous fluctuation state is a gaming state in which the non-time saving state is changed to the time saving state, and the game ball is configured to easily enter the right start winning device 432, and the game ball easily enters the specific passage QA. The operation pattern (pattern A) of the grand prize device 433 is in a gaming state where it is easy to select with a high probability, and the selection of the operation pattern will be described later.

In the favorable fluctuation state, the lower prize winning device 433 operates based on the starting prize, and a big hit occurs when the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 enters the specific passage QA. Therefore, the player relates to the second special symbol generated based on the entry to the start prize (mainly, the right start prize device 432 provided on the right side of the same game board 400 as the lower grand prize device 433) in the advantageous fluctuation state. The right of the unit game is generated by the start prize) and the game is executed.

In the favorable fluctuation state, either pattern A or pattern B is selected by lottery as the operation pattern of the lower prize winning device 433 that operates based on the starting prize. Although the details will be described later, the pattern A is a pattern in which the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is substantially always guided to the specific passage QA, and the pattern B is the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433. Is a pattern that is not substantially guided to the specific passage QA. The lottery (selection) of the operation pattern of the lower prize winning device 433 is executed as a part of the special symbol-related processing S1217 (see FIG. 12), and in the present embodiment, the selection probability of the pattern A and the pattern B is , 40% and 60%, respectively. The selection probabilities of pattern A and pattern B may be different selection probabilities corresponding to the gaming state. In this case, the pattern A may be set to be more difficult to be selected in the normal gaming state than in the advantageous fluctuation state. Preferably, only the pattern B may be selected in the normal game state which is not the advantageous fluctuation state, and the game ball may not enter the specific passage QA in the normal game state.

In the advantageous fluctuation state, the unit game generated by the start winning is determined and stopped by the fluctuation display of the special symbol according to the lottery result (that is, pattern A or pattern B) related to the operation pattern of the lower prize winning device 433. After the end, the lower prize winning device 433 operates in the operation pattern selected by the lottery (that is, the operation pattern corresponding to the fixed stop in the pattern A or the pattern B).

When the lower prize winning device 433 operates in pattern A (mainly when the lower prize winning device 433 operates in pattern A), the player fires a handle to allow the game ball to enter the lower prize winning device 433. Operate 252 to launch a game ball. In the advantageous fluctuation state, as described above, it is set that a big hit occurs when the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 enters the specific passage QA. Therefore, in the favorable fluctuation state, a big hit is substantially generated with a probability that pattern A is selected (that is, a probability of 40%) for one starting prize.

When a big hit occurs in the advantageous fluctuation state, that is, when the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 enters the specific passage QA, the advantageous fluctuation state ends and the game shifts to the special gaming state. The determination of whether or not the game ball has entered the specific passage QA is a part of the special symbol-related process S1217 (see FIG. 12), and the specific passage detected in the switch reading process S1209 (see FIG. 12). It is executed based on the detection state of the switch 448.

In the advantageous fluctuation state, the number of remaining unit games is subtracted by 1 each time the unit game generated by the start winning is completed (that is, each time the special symbol is fixed and stopped), and the number of remaining unit games becomes "0". If no big hit occurs, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the advantageous fluctuation state, a big hit occurs with a probability of substantially 40% for one start winning, so that a unit that can be executed in the advantageous fluctuation state. When the upper limit of the number of games is three, a big hit will occur with a probability of about 80% in the advantageous fluctuation state. As described above, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the advantageous fluctuation state is likely to continue once a big hit occurs in the normal game state, so that the interest of the game in which the big hit is generated in the normal game state is improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the operation pattern of the lower prize winning device 433 executed in the favorable fluctuation state will be described. FIG. 18 is a timing chart showing the operation of the lower prize winning device 433 in the favorable fluctuation state. More specifically, FIG. 18A is a timing chart showing the operation of the lower prize winning device 433 operating in the pattern B, and FIG. 18B is an operation of the lower prize winning device 433 operating in the pattern A. It is a timing chart showing.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when the operation of the lower prize winning device 433 according to the pattern B is started, the upper entry restricting solenoid 464 shifts from the off state to the on state (time ta0), but for a very short period (time ta0). In the present embodiment, it returns to the off state after 0.06 seconds) (time ta1). As a result, the upper entry restricting mechanism 454 shifts from the entry prohibited posture to the approach allowed posture, but immediately returns to the approach prohibited posture after shifting to the approach allowed posture.

Similarly, when the operation of the lower prize winning device 433 according to the pattern B is started, the switching solenoid 465 shifts from the off state to the on state (time ta0), but for a very short period (0.06 seconds in this embodiment). It later returns to the off state (time ta1). As a result, the distribution mechanism 601 (see FIG. 16) is immersed in the game from the non-guided posture in which the game ball is guided to the non-specific passage QB without being guided to the specific passage QA by projecting forward. It shifts to the guided posture that guides the ball to the specific passage QA, but immediately returns to the non-guided posture after shifting to the guided posture.

The switching solenoid 465 shifts from the off state to the on state again after a predetermined period TA (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) after returning to the off state at time ta1 (time ta2). The switching solenoid 465 is maintained in the on state for a predetermined period TB (2.56 seconds in the present embodiment) from the time ta2, and then returns to the off state (time ta4).

On the other hand, the upper approach restricting solenoid 464 shifts from the off state to the on state again after a predetermined period TC (3 seconds in this embodiment) after returning to the off state at time ta1 (time ta3). It returns to the off state after a very short period (0.06 seconds in this embodiment) (time ta4). As a result, the upper entry control mechanism 454 immediately returns to the entry prohibition posture after shifting from the entry prohibition posture to the entry allowance posture, as in the case immediately after starting the operation of the lower prize winning device 433.

During the minute period (that is, the period from time ta0 to time ta1 and the period from time ta3 to time ta4) from the off state to the time when the upper approach regulation solenoid 464 is once turned on and returned to the off state, the game ball The period is set so that the lower prize winning device 433 can be entered only with an extremely low probability through the upper entry control mechanism 454.

The minute period from the off state to the time when the switching solenoid 465 is once turned on and returned to the off state (that is, the period from time ta0 to time ta1) is during the minute period when the upper entry restricting solenoid 464 is in the on state. Even if the ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433, it is set to a period during which the game ball returns to the off state and ends before reaching the distribution mechanism 601.

The period from when the switching solenoid 465 returns to the off state at time ta1 until it is turned on again at time ta2 (that is, the period TA) is the first minute period (that is, the period TA) when the upper entry restricting solenoid 464 is turned on. That is, even if the game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433 through the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 during the period from time ta0 to time ta1), the game ball is moved to the non-specific passage QB by the distribution mechanism 601 in the non-guided posture. It is set to a period that can be guided to.

Since the switching solenoid 465 returns to the off state at the time ta4, the game ball is moved to the upper approach restricting mechanism during the second minute period (that is, the period from the time ta3 to the time ta4) when the upper approach restricting solenoid 464 is turned on. Even if the lower prize winning device 433 can be entered through 454, the game ball is guided to the non-specific passage QB by the distribution mechanism 601 in the non-guided posture.

Therefore, during the two minute periods (that is, the period from time ta0 to time ta1 and the period from time ta3 to time ta4) when the upper entry restricting solenoid 464 is turned on, the game ball is attached to the lower prize winning device 433. Even if it enters, the game ball is substantially guided to the non-specific passage QB instead of the specific passage QA.

In this way, when the lower prize winning device 433 operates in pattern B, the upper entry regulation solenoid 464 is turned on only for a short period of time, so that the probability that the game ball will enter the lower prize winning device 433 is low. In addition, even if the game ball enters the lower prize winning device 433, the game ball is not substantially guided to the specific passage QA.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, when the operation of the lower prize winning device 433 according to the pattern A is started, the upper entry restricting solenoid 464 shifts from the off state to the on state, thereby restricting the upper entry. The mechanism 454 shifts from the entry prohibited posture to the approach allowed posture (time td0). After shifting to the on state, the upper approach restricting solenoid 464 maintains the on state for a predetermined period (3.64 seconds in this embodiment), and returns to the off state at the time td4 (time td4).

That is, when the lower prize winning device 433 operates in the pattern A, the upper entry restricting mechanism 454 shifts from the entry prohibition posture to the entry allowance posture after the upper entry regulation solenoid 464 shifts to the ON state at time td0. At time td4, the approach allowed posture remains until the upper approach restricting solenoid 464 returns to the off state.

On the other hand, the switching solenoid 465 shifts from the off state to the on state (time td0) when the operation of the lower prize winning device 433 is started, as in the pattern B described above, but for a very short period (0 in the present embodiment). After (06 seconds), it returns to the off state (time td1). The switching solenoid 465 shifts from the off state to the on state again after a predetermined period TA after returning to the off state at the time td1 (time td2). The switching solenoid 465 is maintained in the on state for a predetermined period TB from the time td2, and then returns to the off state (time td3).

As a result, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 based on the cooperative operation of the upper entry control solenoid 464 (upper entry control mechanism 454) and the switching solenoid 465 (distribution mechanism 601) from time td to time td3. You will be guided to the specific passage QA or to the non-specific passage QB.

Here, the period TB is set to be a time length sufficiently longer than the firing interval of the game ball (0.6 seconds in the present embodiment). Therefore, when the lower prize winning device 433 operates in the pattern A, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is at least one of the game balls as long as the game ball continues to be properly launched (launched) from the launching device 330. However, in the period TB, it is practically always guided to the specific passage QA.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the game ball enters the specific passage QA of the lower prize winning device 433 and a big hit occurs in the advantageous fluctuation state that shifts after the end of the special game state, the game The state is configured to shift to the special gaming state again. In particular, since the probability of occurrence of a big hit in the advantageous fluctuation state is set as high as about 80%, once a big hit occurs in the normal gaming state, the advantageous fluctuation state is likely to continue.

On the other hand, since it is a condition of continuation that the game ball enters the specific passage QA of the lower prize winning device 433 in the advantageous fluctuation state, the player can see the lower prize winning device 433 in the pattern A in the advantageous fluctuation state. Whether or not it operates is determined from the fixed stop of the special symbol, and when the lower prize winning device 433 operates in pattern A, the firing handle 252 is continuously operated so that the game ball enters the lower prize winning device 433 (game). You need to keep firing the ball).

Considering that the unit game related to the special game state or the special symbol automatically ends with the passage of time, when a big hit occurs in the normal game state, the player is given a privilege in the advantageous fluctuation state (that is, relatively). Unless you abandon the high probability of a big hit), you will not be able to take a break away from the pachinko machine 100 you are playing until the favorable fluctuation state ends.

In response to this problem, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is held and the number of times the unit game right related to the second special symbol is held are predetermined conditions (hereinafter, When this condition is satisfied (referred to as "long fluctuation occurrence condition"), the fluctuation display of the unit game to be executed next time is a period longer than the fluctuation time predetermined for the fluctuation display. It is configured to run for a variable time of a specific period (eg, 5 minutes) that allows the player to rest away from the pachinko machine 100.

As a result, the player delays the fixed stop timing (that is, the display timing of the stop symbol) in the variation display of the unit game to be executed next time by satisfying the long variation generation condition as necessary. Therefore, it is possible to leave the pachinko machine 100 during the period of the unit game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even after a big hit occurs in the normal gaming state, the pachinko machine 100 does not abandon the privilege in the advantageous fluctuation state (that is, the probability of occurrence of a relatively high big hit). It becomes possible to move away from.

In addition, when the condition for generating long fluctuations is not satisfied, the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of each unit game is set to a different length depending on whether or not the jackpot lottery for the unit game is successful, and the case where the player wins the game is better. Although it is set longer than the case where the player does not win, as described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the condition for generating the long fluctuation is satisfied, regardless of whether the big hit lottery for the next unit game is won or not. , The variable display of the unit game is executed in a specific period. That is, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the player can leave the pachinko machine 100 without abandoning the privilege in the advantageous fluctuation state regardless of whether the jackpot lottery for the next unit game is successful or not. ..

When the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the maximum period (for example, a period of 15 to 60 seconds) of the fluctuation display of each unit game in the state where the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not satisfied is satisfied. A specific period sufficiently longer than (60 seconds period) is set, and this length is preferably approximately twice or more, and is approximately five times or more, with respect to the maximum length of the variation display of each unit game. Is preferable.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of times the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is held is one, and the number of times the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is held is four times. In some cases, the condition for generating long fluctuations is satisfied.

In the special gaming state, the player fires the game ball aiming at the game area on the right side of the game board 400 so that the game ball enters the lower prize winning device 433 or the upper prize winning device 434. Therefore, in the special game state and the advantageous fluctuation state, the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol generated based on the game ball entering the right start winning device 432 is likely to be reserved.

Therefore, the player who plays the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment can satisfy the long variation generation condition by moving the game ball into the upper right start winning device 731 during the special gaming state. Alternatively, it is also possible to satisfy the long fluctuation generation condition by allowing the game ball to enter the upper right start winning device 731 during the advantageous fluctuation state.

When the long fluctuation generation condition is satisfied, the main control board 920 has a first special symbol so that the unit game to be executed next time in the display control process S1219 is a fluctuation display for a specific period (for example, 5 minutes). Alternatively, the operation of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 related to the second special symbol is controlled. On the other hand, the sub-control board 940 executes operation control so that the display synchronized with the fluctuation display for a specific period controlled by the main control board 920 is performed by the decorative symbol display device 479.

As the display performed by the decorative symbol display device 479 over a specific period based on the establishment of the long variation occurrence condition, the normal decorative symbol variation display executed before and after the start and end of the specific period, that is, the decorative symbol display It may be a scroll display of a plurality of number strings performed at the center of the screen of the device 479, or a display other than the usual variable display of the decorative symbol may be displayed at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

When a display other than the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the establishment of the long variation occurrence condition, the variable display of the decorative symbol may not be displayed or the decoration may be displayed. The variable display of the symbol may be displayed small in the corner (for example, the lower right corner) of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

When a display other than the normal decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, also referred to as a predetermined screen display) is displayed in the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the establishment of the long variation occurrence condition, the predetermined screen display is displayed. It is configured to be displayed during a specific period, and at the end of the specific period, the normal size decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol of the size displayed in the variable display of the normal decorative symbol) according to the result of the big hit lottery is fixedly stopped. Alternatively, it may be configured to return (return) from the predetermined screen display to the normal variable display of the decorative pattern in the middle of the specific period.

In the middle of the specific period, the lottery result of the big hit lottery (the lottery result related to the operation pattern of the lower prize winning device 433) is stopped by confirming the lottery result of the big hit lottery by returning from the predetermined screen display to the normal variable display of the decorative symbol. It becomes possible for the player to sufficiently visually recognize the process in which is displayed.

In addition, in the configuration of returning to the normal variation display of the decorative symbol in the middle of the specific period, the variation display of the initial decorative symbol in the unit game being executed (that is, the normal variation display when the long variation occurrence condition is not satisfied) The variable display of the decorative symbol) may be executed from the beginning of the variable display, or the initial decorative symbol in the unit game being executed from a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds before) from the end of the specific period. It may be configured to execute the final stage portion including the fixed stop portion in the variable display of. In the case of the configuration in which the variable display is executed from the beginning, the variable display may be started from the decorative symbol that has been fixedly stopped in the previous unit game, or a predetermined decorative symbol (for example, "1, 2") may be started. , 3 ”) may be used to start the variable display.

In the configuration of returning from the predetermined screen display to the variable display of the normal decorative symbol in the middle of the specific period, the decoration is used to notify the timing of the return before returning to the variable display of the normal decorative symbol. A predetermined countdown display (for example, numbers corresponding to the remaining time are sequentially displayed) may be displayed on the symbol display device 479. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the timing at which the fluctuation display of the normal decorative symbol is started, and to expect the player to stop confirming the lottery result of the big hit lottery to be displayed in the future. The countdown display may be displayed periodically during a specific period, for example, every 30 seconds, or may be displayed in detail immediately before the return, for example, every 1 second from 10 seconds before. ..

A display that prompts the player to prepare for launching the game ball in accordance with the countdown display or instead of the countdown display so that the game ball enters the lower prize winning device 433 that operates after the special symbol is fixed and stopped (hereinafter, This display is referred to as "launch preparation display") may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. The launch preparation display may be configured to display the lottery result related to the operation pattern of the lower prize winning device 433 regardless of whether the lottery result is pattern A or pattern B, but the launch preparation display is substantially advantageous. It is preferable to execute at least in the pattern A in which a big hit occurs in the state (that is, the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 is substantially always guided to the specific passage QA), and the launch preparation display is on the right. It is preferable to display a display (for example, "preparation for right-handed hitting") that prompts an operation corresponding to the hitting game technique.

In addition, since no one, including the player, can proceed with the game while the special symbol variation display is being executed, the variation time of the special symbol variation display is predetermined when the long variation occurrence condition is satisfied. A book that has a specific period (for example, 5 minutes) longer than the current fluctuation time (that is, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol to the display of the stop display when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not satisfied). According to the pachinko machine 100 of the embodiment, even if the player leaves the seat during the fluctuation display for the specific period, it is possible to prevent the game from being arbitrarily advanced by another customer who is a third party while the player is away from the seat. it can. As a result, when the condition for generating long fluctuations is satisfied, the player can leave his / her seat without worrying about the arbitrary progress of the game by other customers during the period of the fluctuation display for a specific period. ..

Here, when displaying a predetermined screen display (that is, a display other than the normal decorative symbol variation display) on the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the establishment of the long variation occurrence condition, the player displays the predetermined screen display on the predetermined screen display. The configuration may include information on the ability to leave the seat corresponding to the state in which the person can leave the seat.

For example, with the start of the variable display for a specific period, as shown in FIG. 19, a small decorative symbol Z is variablely displayed in the right corner of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, and is substantially centered on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. By displaying the character string "Available to leave" as the information J that allows leaving the seat, it is possible to inform the player that the safety is high even if the person leaves the seat. By displaying the absentee information J on the decorative symbol display device 479 in this way, the player can know when he / she can safely leave the seat based on the absentee information.

The information J that allows the player to leave the seat is not limited to the character string that allows the player to leave the seat, but is a character string that indicates the content corresponding to the state in which the player can leave the seat, other than the character string that allows the player to leave the seat. It may be a still image such as a pattern showing the content, or a moving image such as an animation. Further, the leaveable information J does not necessarily have to be substantially in the center of the screen with an open space by displaying the decorative symbol Z in a small size, and is displayed in the open space on the screen in which the normal decorative symbol is variablely displayed. May be configured.

Further, since the variable display of the special symbol is also performed on the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, when the information J for leaving the seat is displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, the decorative symbol Z is displayed on the same screen. It may be configured not to. That is, the display device that displays the variation of the special symbol (identification information) and the display device that displays the information J that allows the person to leave the seat may have different configurations. Further, a dedicated display device for displaying the display of the leaveable information J may be provided separately from the decorative symbol display device 479.

Further, when the fluctuation display due to the long fluctuation time is performed based on the establishment of the long fluctuation generation condition, the effect device such as the decorative symbol display device 479 is prompted to input to the input operation device 260. The pachinko machine 100 may be able to recognize the presence or absence of a player depending on whether or not an input operation is executed for the display by displaying the effect, and the game is played in the latter half of the variable display or during a certain period near the end. If the existence of the person cannot be confirmed, the player is output seating information by a predetermined voice such as "Please return to the seat", or a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown). The absence information corresponding to the absence of the player may be output to an external device such as. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the variable display from ending when the player is away from the seat and then proceeding with the game while the player is away from the seat.

According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is configured to be performed in a relatively long specific period (for example, 5 minutes). This made it possible for the player to leave the pachinko machine 100 without abandoning the profits obtained from the favorable fluctuation state, but by using the specific period, the player's mood is reset (switched). It is also possible to make it.

For example, when the display performed by the decorative symbol display device 479 over a specific period based on the establishment of the long variation occurrence condition is a display other than the variable display of the decorative symbol, the display (display other than the variable display of the decorative symbol) is performed. ) Is a predetermined screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized (reset), so that the mood of the player who sees the screen display can be reset.

As an example of a predetermined screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized, the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized (reset) by operating the power switch 909 or the initialization switch 907. The screen display (moving image or still image) of the initial screen actually displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 can be illustrated, or the blackout display in which the power switch 909 is turned off and the screen becomes black is displayed. A screen display including the same or substantially the same display can be exemplified.

Alternatively, as another example of the predetermined screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized, a character string that reminds the player of the initialization of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, "resetting"). The screen display of a pseudo initial screen formed by displaying a character string), a symbol, a pattern, etc. on an extinguished background can be illustrated.

In this way, as the display performed by the decorative symbol display device 479 over a specific period based on the establishment of the long fluctuation occurrence condition, it is similar to the screen display of the initial screen displayed at the time of actual initialization or the pseudo initial screen. By using the screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized (reset), it is possible to make the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized during a specific period. As a result, it is possible to reset the mood of the player who was playing the game with the pachinko machine 100. Then, by resetting the mood of the player during the specific period, the player can renew his mood and face the game after the end of the specific period.

Alternatively, when the display performed by the decorative symbol display device 479 over a specific period based on the establishment of the long variation occurrence condition is a display other than the variable display of the decorative symbol, the display (display other than the variable display of the decorative symbol) is performed. ) Is a predetermined screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has entered the standby state, so that the mood of the player who sees the screen display can be reset.

As an example of a predetermined screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has entered the standby state, a so-called “customer waiting effect” (that is, when the time when the pachinko machine 100 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time). An example of an effect display irrelevant to the gaming state, such as a title display or a demo display, displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479) can be exemplified.

In this way, as a display performed by the decorative symbol display device 479 for a specific period based on the establishment of the long fluctuation occurrence condition, the player can see the pachinko machine 100 as if it has entered the standby state, such as a customer waiting effect. By using the screen display that makes the player feel, it is possible to make the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has switched to the standby state in which the pachinko machine 100 is not playing during a specific period, thereby playing the game on the pachinko machine 100. The mood of the player can be reset. Then, by resetting the mood of the player during the specific period, the player can renew his mood and face the game after the end of the specific period.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot in the advantageous fluctuation state is set as high as about 80%, and the advantageous fluctuation state is easily continued. It is also a configuration in which it is possible to return to the normal gaming state after the advantageous fluctuation state with a probability of about 20%. Therefore, sometimes, even if a big hit occurs in the normal game state, it may continue to return to the normal game state after the advantageous fluctuation state, and in such a case, the player feels the game as boring and reduces the motivation to play. There was a risk that it would end up.

In response to this problem, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the player uses the display performed by the decorative symbol display device 479 for a specific period based on the establishment of the long fluctuation generation condition. It is possible to reset the mood. Therefore, if the return to the normal gaming state continues even after the transition to the advantageous fluctuation state, the player intentionally adjusts the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252 to satisfy the long fluctuation generation condition, thereby satisfying the long fluctuation generation condition for a specific period. After the end of the game, you can renew your mood and start playing the game, and as a result, you can suppress the decline in your motivation to play due to not being able to receive the benefits in the favorable fluctuation state. In this case, the launch handle 252 functions as an operation unit for performing a pseudo reset operation for displaying an image capable of resetting the player's feelings on the decorative symbol display device 479.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player puts the game ball on the upper right start winning device 731 in the situation where the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is four times during the special game state. By entering, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the unit game to be executed next time can be set to a period (specific period) longer than the predetermined fluctuation time. As a result, the player can leave the pachinko machine 100 during the period of the unit game executed in a specific period, and therefore abandon the privilege in the advantageous fluctuation state (that is, the probability of occurrence of a relatively high jackpot). It is possible to take a break or the like away from the pachinko machine 100 at least.

In order to allow the game ball to enter the upper right start winning device 731, after launching the game ball from the launching device 330 with a firing intensity in the second intensity range, the game ball following the game ball is continuously subjected to the first intensity. It is necessary to launch from the launcher 330 with a range of launch intensity. Therefore, in order to establish the long fluctuation generation condition that enables the pachinko machine 100 to take a break, the player needs to intentionally adjust the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 252, and thus the launch device. It is possible to reduce the monotony of the game performed by firing the game ball from 330. Further, in order to satisfy the condition for generating long fluctuations, the skill of the player is required to some extent, and in that respect as well, the monotony of the game performed by launching the game ball from the launching device 330 can be reduced. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is as if the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized (reset) as a display performed by the decorative symbol display device 479 over a specific period based on the establishment of the long fluctuation generation condition. By using the screen display that makes the player feel, or the screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has entered the standby state, it is possible to reset (switch) the mood of the player. Therefore, the player can reduce the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252 in a situation where the flow of the game in the game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state is not preferable, such as the player continues to return to the normal game state even if the player shifts to the advantageous fluctuation state. By intentionally adjusting (that is, performing a pseudo reset operation on the launch handle 252) and satisfying the condition for generating long fluctuations, after the end of a specific period, one's mood is refreshed and the game is started. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to not being able to receive benefits in a favorable fluctuation state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display of a specific period (a period longer than the fluctuation time when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not satisfied) is performed based on the establishment of the long fluctuation occurrence condition, the player By displaying the information J that corresponds to the state in which the player can leave the seat, the player is notified of the time when the player can safely leave the seat, whereby the player can safely leave the seat.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 22. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment, when the player plays a game by the right-handed gaming method during the special gaming state, is there a large number of gaming balls sensuously entering the upper prize winning device 434? In order to give such an impression to the player, the ball passage formed in the right game area that can be entered through the right flow area 708 or the middle flow area 709 has been devised. In the following description, the same configurations as those in the first and second embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board 400 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 20, the schematic outer shape of the main structure provided on the game board 400 is shown, and the front plate portion of each of the middle start winning device 831 and the general winning device 439B is cut off. It is shown as a cross-sectional view, and hatching of the cross section is omitted in the cross-sectional view. Further, in FIG. 20, a part of the game ball P flowing down is shown for reference.

Hereinafter, the main structural configuration of the game board 400 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 20. As shown in FIG. 20, in the game board 400 of the present embodiment, the middle start winning device 831 is arranged below the central structure 420. The middle start winning device 831 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left middle starting winning device 831A and the right middle starting winning device 831B) are integrated. The left middle start winning device 831A is a starting device related to the first special symbol, and the right middle starting winning device 831B is a starting device related to the second special symbol. That is, the middle start winning device 831 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device related to the first special symbol and a starting device related to the second special symbol.

The middle start winning device 831 is provided with a distribution mechanism 831D that mechanically distributes the game balls to the left and right by operating the game balls that have entered from the entrance 831C in a seesaw shape using the weight of the game balls. The distribution mechanism 831D alternately distributes the game ball to the left ball passage or the right ball passage each time the game ball enters from the entrance 831C. The ball passage on the left side, which is the distribution destination of the distribution mechanism 831D, is configured as a passage extending from the top to the bottom and then to the back side (rear side). The ball passage on the right side, which is the distribution destination of the distribution mechanism 831D, is also configured as a passage extending from the top to the bottom and then to the back side.

In the ball passage on the left side, which is the distribution destination of the distribution mechanism 831D, the discharge port at which the game ball flowing down the ball passage on the left side is discharged to the outside of the medium start winning device 831 with a low probability bends to the back side. An inlet portion of the left middle start winning device 831A is provided on the downstream side of the discharge port. On the other hand, in the ball passage on the right side, which is the distribution destination of the distribution mechanism 831D, there is a low probability that the game ball flowing down the ball passage on the right side is discharged to the outside of the medium start winning device 831. The entrance portion of the right middle start winning device 831B is provided on the downstream side of the discharge port.

Therefore, the game ball that has entered the middle start winning device 831 may be discharged to the game area with a low probability before entering the left middle start winning device 831A or the right middle starting winning device 831B, but basically. The left middle start winning device 831A or the right middle starting winning device 831B are alternately entered. The entrance portion of the game ball of the left middle start winning device 831A constitutes the winning opening of the left middle starting winning device 831A, and the entrance portion of the game ball of the right middle starting winning device 831B is the right middle starting winning device 831B. Make up the winning opening.

The game board 400 is provided with a left middle start winning switch that detects a game ball that has entered the left middle starting winning device 831A, and a right middle starting winning switch that detects a game ball that has entered the right middle starting winning device 831B. Has been done. The left middle start winning switch and the right middle starting winning switch are the same switches as the starting winning switches 441A, 441B, 442 (see FIG. 10), and are connected to the main control board 920.

When the left middle start winning switch detects the game ball that has entered the left middle start winning device 831A, the middle start winning switch 441A, 441B detects the game ball that has entered the middle start winning devices 431A, 431B (see FIG. 7). As in the case, the first special symbol will be the starting prize. On the other hand, when the right middle start winning switch detects a game ball that has entered the right middle start winning device 831B, and when the right starting winning switch 442 detects a game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432 (see FIG. 7). Similarly, the start prize for the second special symbol will be awarded.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a guide passage 711 similar to that of the second embodiment is formed between the upper edge side of the central structure 420 and the outer rail 402, and the player can play the game ball. By rotating the launch handle 252 so as to enter the right flow area 708 or the middle flow area 709 via the guide passage 711, the game ball is made to enter the game area on the right side with respect to the central structure 420 (that is, right-handed game). You can play games by the method).

On the downstream side of the right flow down area 708 and the middle flow down area 709, a right ball passage 810 extending directly above the upper prize winning device 434 is continuously provided. The right ball passage 810 includes an upper right passage portion 810A connected to the downstream side of the right flow down region 708 and the middle flow down region 709, a right middle passage portion 810B connected to the downstream side of the upper right passage portion 810A, and the middle right. It is composed of a lower right passage portion 810C which is connected to the downstream side of the passage portion 810B and extends to the upper prize winning device 434.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the right ball passage 810, among the passage portions constituting the right ball passage 810, the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810C have the passage portions thicker than the right middle passage portion 810B above and below. It is configured to have at least a section continuous in the direction. That is, the right middle passage portion 810B is configured to have a passage portion thinner than the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810C. As a result, the right ball passage 810 is configured as a constricted passage in the right middle passage portion 810B. Further, the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810C are configured to be longer in the vertical direction than the width in the horizontal direction, and the thick passage portion is long and continuous in the vertical direction.

On the right end side of the right middle passage portion 810B, a branch passage 820 which is a branch passage for the lower right passage portion 810C is continuously provided. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 through the right flow down region 708 and the middle flow down region 709 enters the right middle passage portion 810B via the upper right passage portion 810A, and enters the right middle passage portion 810B in the right middle passage portion 810B. It branches to either 810C or branch passage 820 and flows down.

Of the nails 411 erected on the game board 400, the two nails 411A and 411B arranged in the right middle passage portion 810B serve as branch ports to the branch passage 820 (that is, the entrance of the branch passage 820). Function. Such a branch port is in the vertical direction about a line segment having the maximum length in the left-right direction (for example, a line segment crossing the center of the game area in the left-right direction) in a substantially circular game area formed on the game board 400. Is provided on the right end side in a region having a predetermined width (that is, the end side of the game board 400 on which the right ball passage 810 is formed).

The region having a predetermined width in the vertical direction with the line segment having the maximum length in the left-right direction in the substantially circular game region as the center is, for example, a line segment crossing the center of the game region in the left-right direction. It is preferably a region having a vertical width set to be about 8 cm or less in the vertical direction, preferably about 4 cm or less, and preferably about 2 cm or less.

Alternatively, as a region having a predetermined width in the vertical direction centered on the line segment having the maximum length in the left-right direction in the substantially circular game area, for example, a line segment crossing the center of the game area in the left-right direction is set as the center. It is often an area having a vertical width set to be approximately 25% or less of the length of a line segment extending in the vertical direction through the center of the game area (hereinafter referred to as "the height of the game area"). A line segment that crosses the center in the left-right direction is the center, and it is preferable that the area has a vertical width set to a length of about 15% or less of the height of the game area, and a line that crosses the center of the game area in the left-right direction. It is preferable that the area has a vertical width set to be approximately 5% or less of the height of the game area centered on the line segment.

In the upper right passage portion 810A, a device (passage detection device) is provided in which a combination operation device 435 and a starter device 436 are integrally configured to detect the passage of a game ball, and the passage detection devices 435 and 436 are provided. It is arranged substantially in the center of the upper right passage portion 810A in the left-right direction. The passage detection devices 435 and 436 are provided with a switch for detecting the passage of a game ball in which the above-mentioned combination operation switch 445 and start switch 446 (see FIG. 10) are composed of one switch. The combination operation device 435 and the start device 436 may be provided separately, and the combination operation switch 445 and the start switch 446 may also be provided separately.

In the lower right passage portion 810C, the general winning device 439C is provided at a position closer to the left side of the upper right passage portion 810A on the side of the large winning device 434 above half the height of the upper right passage portion 810A. ing. The height of the upper right passage portion 810A may be, for example, simply the distance between the highest position and the lowest position, or from the entrance accessible to the upper right passage portion 810A and the upper right passage portion 810A. The distance from the outlet from which the game ball is discharged may be used. When there are a plurality of entrances that can enter the upper right passage portion 810A or outlets from which the game ball is discharged from the upper right passage portion 810A, the predetermined entrance or exit (for example, the highest position) among the plurality of entrances or exits. An entrance) may be used, or a position in the middle of a plurality of entrances or exits may be used.

Similar to the general prize devices 439A and 439B described above, the general prize device 439C is a prize device in which a certain number of game balls are paid out as prize balls without receiving a winning or losing lottery when the game balls win a prize. The entrance portion of the game ball of the general winning device 439C constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball entering the winning opening is a collection / discharge passage formed on the back side of the base 401 through a through hole formed in the base 401 (shown). Will be guided to.

The game board 400 is provided with a general winning switch that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning device 439C. The general winning switch is a general winning switch similar to the general winning switches 449A and 449B, and is connected to the main control board 920. When the general winning switch detects a game ball that has entered the general winning device 439C, the general winning device becomes a prize as in the case where the game ball that has entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B is detected by the general winning switches 449A and 449B. The number of game balls set for the 439C is paid out as a prize ball.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, the game area on the right side of the middle start winning device 831 and on the left side of the lower prize winning device 433 (hereinafter, this game area is simply referred to as "the game area on the left side of the lower prize winning device 433". A general winning device 439B and a lower right starting winning device 832 are provided in (referred to as).

The lower right start winning device 832 is a starting device according to the second special symbol, like the right starting winning device 432 (see FIG. 7). The entrance portion of the game ball of the lower right starting winning device 832 constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball entering the winning opening is guided to the collection / discharge passage through the through hole formed in the base 401.

The lower right start winning device 832 enters the game ball into the opening (winning opening) by shifting between the opening that serves as the winning opening formed in the game board 400 and the approach-allowed posture and the entry-prohibited posture. It is equipped with an entry control mechanism 852 that changes the probability. The entry control mechanism 852 includes a thin plate-shaped movable piece driven by a solenoid, and the movable piece has an upward support surface (plate surface) that supports the lower side of the game ball and guides it to the winning opening on the rear side. It is inserted into the opening of the lower right start winning device 832 so as to face.

The solenoid that drives the movable piece of the entry control mechanism 852 is composed of a solenoid connected to the main control board 920 like the right entry control solenoid 462, but is composed of an electric drive means other than the solenoid. Alternatively, it may be configured by a mechanically operating mechanism represented by a mechanism that operates by the own weight of the game ball that has entered the predetermined area.

When the entry control mechanism 852 is in the no-entry posture, the movable piece is arranged so as to be immersed in the opening of the lower right starting winning device 832, so that the movable piece is placed in the opening of the lower right starting winning device 832 (winning opening). ) Is blocked from entering the game ball. As a result, when the entry control mechanism 852 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the lower right start winning device 832. Therefore, when the entry control mechanism 852 is in the entry prohibition posture, even if there is a game ball heading for the lower right start winning device 832, the game ball starts at the lower right without entering the lower right start winning device 832. It passes in front of the winning device 832 and flows down to the downstream side.

On the other hand, when the approach control mechanism 852 is in the approach allowable posture, the movable piece is arranged so as to protrude from the opening of the lower right start winning device 832, so that the movable piece receives the game ball flowing down from above and opens. Guide to (winning opening). As a result, when the approach control mechanism 852 is in the approach allowable posture, the game ball can enter the lower right start winning device 832.

The game board 400 is provided with a lower right start winning switch that detects a game ball that has entered the lower right start winning device 832. The lower right start winning switch is the same switch as the right starting winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10) described above, and is connected to the main control board 920.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the game area on the right side with respect to the central structure 420 in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged front view of the right side of the game board 400 in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment.

Note that FIG. 21 shows a schematic outline of the main structures provided in the game area. Further, the opening 210A (see FIG. 1) of the front decorative body 210 of the front block 102 that covers the front of the game board 400 has an outer edge that is not a simple straight line. The outer edge of the opening 210A is schematically illustrated by a straight line of the alternate long and short dash line. Further, in FIG. 21, the main flow paths of the game ball in the game area on the right side are illustrated by arrows.

As described above, in the game area on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the right ball passage 810 is provided on the downstream side of the right flow down area 708 and the middle flow down area 709, and at a position upstream of the upper prize winning device 434. Has been done.

The game ball that has entered the upper right passage portion 810A from the right flow down region 708 or the middle flow down region 709 flows down to the downstream side by a plurality of downflow routes according to the arrangement of the nails 411 arranged in the upper right passage portion 810A. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, the flow path of the game ball in the upper right passage portion 810A is roughly classified into a path toward the passage detection devices 435 and 436 and passing through the passage detection devices 435 and 436, and a passage detection device 435 and a passage detection device 435. There are three systems: a route that passes through the right side of the 436 and a route that passes through the left side of the passage detection devices 435 and 436. The paths passing through the right and left sides of the passage detection devices 435 and 436 are further subdivided by the arrangement of the nails 411.

In this way, the upper right passage portion 810A is roughly divided into a thick passage portion including three flow paths, so that the game ball that has entered the upper right passage portion 810A flows down any one of the three flow paths. It flows down to the downstream side while scattering in the left-right direction.

All the game balls that have passed through the upper right passage portion 810A enter the right middle passage portion 810B. As described above, the right middle passage portion 810B has a passage portion thinner than the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810C, and thereby functions as a ball passage including a constricted portion in the right ball passage 810. Therefore, the game balls scattered in the left-right direction in the upper right passage portion 810A flow down so as to be collected in the left-right direction in the right middle passage portion 810B.

The game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B enters the lower right passage portion 810C or the branch passage 820. More specifically, the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B is placed between the nail 411B and the nail 411C or between the nail 411C and the nail 411D among the nails 411 arranged in the ball passage 810. When passing, the game ball enters the lower right passage portion 810C. On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B passes between the nail 411A and the nail 411B among the nails 411 arranged in the right middle passage portion 810B, the game ball enters the branch passage 820. enter in.

That is, the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B passes between the nail 411B and the nail 411C or between the nail 411C and the nail 411D, so that the game ball flows down the right middle passage portion 810B without entering the branch passage 820. Enter the passage portion 810C. Therefore, the space between the nail 411B and the nail 411C and the space between the nail 411C and the nail 411D are openings that function as entrances to the lower right passage portion 810C.

Further, as described above, the space between the nail 411A and the nail 411B is an opening that functions as an entrance to the branch passage 820 (that is, a branch port to the branch passage 820), and is a game in which the right middle passage portion 810B flows down. By passing between the nail 411A and the nail 411B, the ball always enters the branch passage 820 without entering the lower right passage portion 810C.

As shown in FIG. 21, the nails 411B, 411C, and 411D form a part of a row of nails arranged so as to be inclined downward to the right toward the entrance to the branch passage 820 (the branch entrance to the branch passage 820). .. Therefore, the row of nails that incline downward to the right, including the nails 411B, 411C, and 411D, forms a boundary between the middle right passage portion 810B and the lower right passage portion 810C, and guides the game ball to the branch passage 820 in the lower right direction. Functions as a guide nail.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B heads for the branch passage 820 along the line of nail rows including the nails 411B, 411C, and 411D at the boundary between the right middle passage portion 810B and the lower right passage portion 810C. Enter the lower right passage portion 810C by flowing in the lower right direction, or by flowing between the nail 411B and the nail 411C, or between the nail 411C and the nail 411D in a direction intersecting the arrangement of the nail rows. To do.

The game ball that has entered the lower right passage portion 810C from the right middle passage portion 810B flows down to the downstream side by a plurality of flow paths according to the arrangement of the nails 411 arranged in the lower right passage portion 810C. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, the flow path of the game ball in the lower right passage portion 810C is roughly divided into a route toward the general winning device 439C and entering the general winning device 439C, passing through the right side of the general winning device 439C. There are three routes, one is a route and the other is a route that passes through the left side of the general winning device 439C. Each route passing through the right side of the general winning device 439C is further subdivided by the arrangement of the nails 411.

In this way, the lower right passage portion 810C is also roughly divided into a thick passage portion including three systems of flow paths, like the upper right passage portion 810A, and therefore, the games collected in the left-right direction in the right middle passage portion 810B. The sphere flows down to the downstream side while being scattered in the left-right direction again in the lower right passage portion 810C.

As shown in FIG. 21, the game balls flowing down the lower right passage portion 810C are arranged side by side in the left-right direction at the most downstream side of the lower right passage portion 810C and directly above the entrance of the upper prize winning device 434. The space between the nails 411 (411E) serves as an outlet, and the nail is discharged from the outlet. The exit of the lower right passage portion 810C formed by the nail 411E is arranged immediately above the entrance of the upper prize winning device 434 in a range narrower than the width (length in the left-right direction) of the entrance.

Therefore, the game ball flowing down the lower right passage portion 810C is discharged from directly above the entrance of the upper prize winning device 434 in a range narrower than the width of the entrance of the upper prize winning device 434. In this case, all the game balls discharged from the lower right passage portion 810C enter the upper prize winning device 434. That is, the game ball that has entered the lower right passage portion 810C when the upper prize winning device 434 is in the entry allowed state has entered the general winning device 439C located upstream of the upper prize winning device 434, except when it has entered the general winning device 439C. All of them can enter the upper prize winning device 434.

When the upper prize winning device 434 is in the entry prohibited state, the game ball that has flowed down the lower right passage portion 810C to the upper prize winning device 433 does not enter the upper prize winning device 434 and reaches the lower prize winning device 433. Flow down. At this time, if the lower prize winning device 433 is in the admissible posture, the game ball can enter the lower prize winning device 433. On the other hand, if the lower prize winning device 433 is in the no-entry posture, it passes above the lower prize winning device 433 and enters the game area on the left side of the lower prize winning device 433.

The branch passage 820 is configured as a ball passage that passes through the right side of the upper prize winning device 434 and extends substantially linearly in the vertical direction to a position below the upper prize winning device 434. As a result, the game ball that has entered the branch passage 820 rarely enters between the lower right passage portion 810C and the upper prize winning device 434 from the opening 820A formed on the upstream side of the upper prize winning device 434. Basically, it passes through the right side of the upper prize winning device 434 and flows down without giving an opportunity to enter the upper prize winning device 434. That is, when the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B enters the branch passage 820, the opportunity for the game ball to enter the upper prize winning device 434 is basically lost.

The game ball that has flowed down the right side of the upper prize winning device 434 in the branch passage 820 can enter the lower prize winning device 433 when the lower prize winning device 433 is in the entry allowable state. On the other hand, if the lower prize winning device 433 is in the no-entry posture, it passes above the lower prize winning device 433 and enters the game area on the left side of the lower prize winning device 433.

A game ball that has entered the game area on the left side of the lower grand prize device 433 by passing above the lower grand prize device 433 can enter the general prize device 439B or the lower right starting prize device 832 arranged in the game area. is there. If the game ball that has entered the game area on the left side of the lower prize winning device 433 cannot enter any of these winning devices 439B and 832, the game ball enters the discharge port 401A and the discharge port 401A. Will guide you to the collection and discharge passage.

Most of the branch passage 820 is located on the outer side of the opening 210A of the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102, except for the vicinity of the nail 411A and the nail 411B forming the branch port to the branch passage 820. That is, most of the branch passage 820 is provided at a position where it overlaps the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction.

In the branch passage 820, when the game ball completely enters the branch passage 820, at least a part of the game ball overlaps the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction (that is, the remaining part overlaps the front surface). It is preferable that most of the branch passage 820 is provided so as to overlap the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction so as not to overlap the decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction.

At this time, as "when the game ball completely enters the branch passage 820", as shown in FIG. 21, the surface of the game ball P forming a branch port (entrance of the branch passage 820) to the branch passage 820. That is, it is the time when the game ball P that has entered the branch passage 820 is in contact with the tangent plane on the center side of the game board 400, which is common to the nail 411A and the nail 411B. Alternatively, it may be the time when the game ball has entered the branch passage 820 to a position where it cannot return to the right middle passage portion 810B.

Further, it is preferable that most of the game balls that have entered the right middle passage portion 810B enter the lower right passage portion 810C and only a small amount enter the branch passage 820, and the game that has entered the right middle passage portion 810B. It is often set that about 70% or more of the sphere enters the lower right passage portion 810C, preferably about 80% or more, and preferably about 90% or more.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the gaming area on the left side of the lower prize winning device 433 in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 22 is a partially enlarged front view of the lower right side of the game board 400 in the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment. Note that FIG. 22 shows a schematic outline of the main structures provided in the game area. Further, in FIG. 22, the main flow paths of the game balls in the game area on the left side of the lower prize winning device 433 are illustrated by arrows, and a part of the game balls flowing down is shown for reference.

As described above, the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 due to the player playing the game by the right-handed game method does not enter the upper prize winning device 434 or passes through the branch passage 820. When the lower grand prize device 433 is reached, if the lower grand prize device 433 is in an entry prohibited posture, the game ball (game ball PA in FIG. 22) does not enter the lower grand prize device 433, and the lower grand prize device 433 is not entered. It enters the game area on the left side of the lower prize winning device 433 through the upper side of the winning device 433.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward to the lower left when the lower prize winning device 433 is in the entry prohibited posture. When the large prize device 433 is in the no-entry posture, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the lower prize device 433 flows down the upper surface of the lower prize device 433 in the lower left direction and is on the left side of the lower prize device 433. It is discharged to the game area.

The upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433 is configured such that the depth width allows the game balls to flow down one by one, but a plurality of game balls cannot flow down side by side in the front-rear direction in front view of the game machine at the same time. Will be done. Therefore, when a plurality of game balls flow down the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433, the plurality of game balls are aligned on the upper surface and flow down along the upper surface in a row in a row in the lower left direction. To do.

As described above, the lower right starting winning device 832 and the general winning device 439B are provided in the game area on the left side of the lower large winning device 433. More specifically, of the lower right starting winning device 832 and the general winning device 439B, the lower right starting winning device 832 has a lower large winning device 433 in the left-right direction of the front view of the gaming machine as compared with the general winning device 439B. It is installed in a close position.

A ball passage 861 for guiding the game ball to the lower right starting winning device 832 is provided on the upstream side of the lower right starting winning device 832, and the game ball is guided to the general winning device 439B on the upstream side of the general winning device 439B. A ball passage 862 is provided. Both the entrance 861A of the ball passage 861 and the entrance 862A of the ball passage 862 are provided at positions downstream of the flow path of the game ball formed by the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433. Therefore, the game ball discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433 can enter either the ball passage 861 or the ball passage 862 via the entrance 861A or the entrance 862A.

More specifically, the entrance 861A is closer to the lower prize winning device 433 in the left-right direction of the front view of the gaming machine than the entrance 862A, and the gaming ball discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433 is It is provided at a position where it can enter with a high probability from the entrance 862A.

When the game ball discharged through the upper surface of the lower large prize device 433 enters the ball passage 861 through the entrance 861A, if the lower right start prize device 832 is in the entry allowable posture, the game ball is the lower right start prize. Enter device 832. On the other hand, if the lower right start winning device 832 is in the no-entry posture, the game ball that has entered the ball passage 861 passes in front of the lower right starting winning device 832 and downstream without entering the lower right starting winning device 832. It flows down to the side. The game ball that has flowed down without entering the lower right start winning device 832 enters the discharge port 401A and is guided to the collection / discharge passage.

Further, the game ball discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433 can enter the entrance 862A via the branch port 863, although the probability is lower than that of the entry to the entrance 861A. The game that has entered the ball passage 862 via the entrance 862A flows down the ball passage 862 and enters the general winning device 439B.

Further, the gaming ball discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433 passes through the branch port 864 with a lower probability than the approach to the entrance 861A or the entrance 862A, and in the left-right direction of the front view of the gaming machine. It moves to the side further away from the lower prize winning device 433 from the entrance 862A. The game ball that has passed through the branch port 864 flows down the game area and reaches the discharge port 401A, and is guided from the discharge port 401A to the collection / discharge passage.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the lower right passage portion 810C located on the most downstream side of the upper right passage portion 810A, the right middle passage portion 810B, and the lower right passage portion 810C constituting the right ball passage 810 is The outlet formed between the nails 411E is arranged directly above the entrance of the upper prize winning device 434 in a range narrower than the width (length in the left-right direction) of the entrance. Therefore, when the upper prize winning device 434 is in the entry allowable state, the game ball that has entered the lower right passage portion 810C is a general winning device arranged upstream of the upper prize winning device 434 in the lower right passage portion 810C. Except for the case of entering 439C, all of them can enter the upper prize winning device 434.

On the other hand, since the right middle passage portion 810B connected to the upstream side of the lower right passage portion 810C is provided with a branch port to the branch passage 820, all the game balls that have entered the upper right passage portion 810A. Does not enter the lower right passage portion 810C, but a part of it enters the lower right passage portion 810C via the branch passage 820, whereby the opportunity to enter the upper prize winning device 434 is basically lost.

Here, in the right ball passage 810, the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810B are roughly classified into a thick passage portion including three flow paths, while the right middle passage portion 810B is the upper right passage portion. It is configured to have a passage portion narrower than the 810A and the lower right passage portion 810C. That is, the right ball passage 810 is configured as a constricted passage in the right middle passage portion 810B.

By configuring the right ball passage 810 in the above shape, the game ball that has entered the upper right passage portion 810A is scattered in the left-right direction so as to flow down one of the three flow paths, and then downstream, and then in the middle right. It flows down in the passage portion 810B so as to be collected in the left-right direction. In this way, since the flow of the game ball changes in the right middle passage portion 810B, even if the game ball enters the branch passage 820 from the branch port in the right middle passage portion 810B, it is difficult for the player to recognize it. ..

Further, the game ball that has entered the lower right passage portion 810C via the right middle passage portion 810B flows down again in the lower right passage portion 810C while being scattered in the left-right direction. Therefore, the flow of the game ball changes again by entering the lower right passage portion 810C from the right middle passage portion 810B. Therefore, in this respect as well, the game ball enters the branch passage 820 from the branch port in the right middle passage portion 810B. Even if it does, it can be difficult for the player to recognize the change.

Further, the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810C sandwiching the right middle passage portion 810B are both thick passage portions including three types of flow paths, and the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion. The 810C is configured to be longer in the vertical direction than the width in the horizontal direction. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to specify the flow path of the game ball in these passage portions 810A and 810C, and the player's line of sight is dispersed. In this respect as well, even if the game ball enters the branch passage 820 from the branch port in the right middle passage portion 810B, it is difficult for the player to recognize that fact.

As a result, although some of the game balls that have entered the upper right passage portion 810A have basically lost the opportunity to enter the branch passage 820 and enter the upper prize winning device 434, that fact is the game. Since it is difficult for a person to recognize it, it is possible to give the player the illusion that all the game balls that have entered the lower right passage portion 810C can enter the upper prize winning device 434 or the general winning device 439C. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that many game balls are sensuously entering the upper prize winning device 434 in the special game state. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the upper prize winning device 434 in the special game state.

Further, since the upper prize winning device 434 is configured so that the game ball can enter through the entrance having a width approximately 5 times the diameter of the game ball in the entry allowed state, the game ball flowing down the lower right passage portion 810C can be used. It is possible to enter the upper prize winning device 434 from various positions in the width direction in the wide upper prize winning device 434 while scattering to the left and right. In this respect as well, it is possible to give the player the impression that many game balls are sensuously entering the upper prize winning device 434.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the improvement of the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the upper prize winning device 434 in the special game state, and the prize ball (game value) acquired by the player. Is excessive, and it is possible to suppress the disadvantages suffered by the amusement park (hall) side at the same time.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the general winning device 439C is provided in the lower right passage portion 810C, the player can shoot the game ball aiming at the upper winning device 434. It is easy to pay attention to these winning devices 434 and 439C because it is concerned about whether to enter the winning device 434 or the general winning device 439C. In particular, since the general winning device 439C is a winning device having a lower value than the upper winning device 434, the player can refer to these winning devices 434 and 439C as the destination of the game ball launched aiming at the upper winning device 434. The degree of attention is high. When the player pays attention to the winning devices 434 and 439C, the player's line of sight tends to deviate from the branch port to the branch passage 820. Therefore, in this respect as well, the game ball is transferred to the branch passage 820 in the right middle passage portion 810B. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not he / she has entered.

Here, the branch port to the branch passage 820 is the right end side in a region having a predetermined width in the vertical direction about a line segment having the maximum length in the left-right direction in the substantially circular game region formed on the game board 400. It is provided in. That is, since the branch port to the branch passage 820 is arranged on the end side of the widest range in the left-right direction in the game area or a range equivalent to this, the player's line of sight is on the branch port to the branch passage 820. It is difficult to reach, so that it is difficult for the player to appropriately recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the branch passage 820 from the branch port.

Further, while the branch port to the branch passage 820 is provided on the right end side of the right middle passage portion 810B, the general winning device 439C is provided at a position closer to the left side in the lower right passage portion 810C. Therefore, by paying attention to the general winning device 439C, the player tends to move his / her line of sight away from the branch port to the branch passage 820, which makes it difficult to monitor. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to preferably recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the branch passage 820 in the right middle passage portion 810B.

Further, the branch port to the branch passage 820 is located on the right end side of the right middle passage portion 810B of the right ball passage 810 provided in the game area on the right side, that is, on the side away from the decorative symbol display device 479 in the right middle passage portion 810B. Since it is provided, when the player pays attention to the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the special game state, the line of sight is easily separated from the branch port to the branch passage 820, and it becomes difficult to monitor. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to preferably recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the branch passage 820 in the right middle passage portion 810B.

Further, since a nail row (a nail row including the nails 411B, 411C, and 411D) that inclines downward toward the branch port to the branch passage 820 is formed, the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B is the nail. Along the array of rows (arrangement that slopes downward to the right), the branch is branched in a relatively fast and natural flow and enters the branch passage 820 from the branch. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, on the upper left side of the nail row including the nails 411B, 411C, and 411D, the passage wall 811 (one of the passage walls of the right ball passage 810) forming a downward inclination to the right together with the nail row. The passage wall 811 also has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B to the branch port of the branch passage 820 in a relatively fast and natural flow.

On the other hand, since the nail row that slopes downward toward the branch port to the branch passage 820 includes the nails 411B, 411C, and 411D that form the entrance to the lower right passage portion 810C, the right middle passage portion The game ball flowing down the 810B can also enter the lower right passage portion 810C from the entrance. At this time, since the flow direction of the game ball entering the entrance of the lower right passage portion 810C intersects with the flow direction of the game ball toward the branch port to the branch passage 820, the entrance of the lower right passage portion 810C. The flow of the game ball entering the lane is unnatural and relaxed as compared with the flow of the game ball toward the branch port to the branch passage 820. Therefore, the flow of the game ball entering the entrance of the lower right passage portion 810C is more likely to leave an impression on the player than the flow of the game ball toward the branch port to the branch passage 820. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to preferably recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the branch passage 820 in the right middle passage portion 810B.

Further, unlike the light transmitting plate (front plate 222, rear plate 223) arranged inside the opening 210A, the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102 cannot visually recognize the back surface side from the front side. It is a part. Therefore, when the game ball P completely enters the surface forming the branch port to the branch passage 820, the branch passage is such that a part of the game ball P overlaps the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction. Since most of the 820 overlaps the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction, the game ball that has entered the branch passage 820 from the right middle passage portion 810B enters the branch passage 820 at the same time as the entry into the branch passage 820, or enters the branch passage 820. As soon as it enters, it enters the back of the front decoration 210, thereby leaving the player's view. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the branch passage 820 in the right middle passage portion 810B.

Further, in a general pachinko machine, the special gaming state ends when a specified number of gaming balls enter the upper prize winning device 434, so that all the gaming balls fired aiming at during the special gaming state are superior. When the winning device 434 is entered, the time required for the specified number of gaming balls to enter the upper prize winning device 434 is shortened, and the special gaming state is completed in a short time. If the special game state is completed in a short time, the special game state that should be excited may become pale and the interest of the game may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the game ball flowing down the right middle passage portion 810B enters the branch passage 820, the opportunity for the game ball to enter the upper prize winning device 434 is basically. Since it is lost, it becomes difficult for the special gaming state to end in a short time, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the special gaming state from becoming pale and deteriorating the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the area on the left side of the lower large winning device 433, the entrance 861A of the ball passage 861 for guiding the game ball to the lower right starting winning device 832, and the game ball in the general winning device 439B. There is an entrance 862A of the ball passage 862 that guides the ball passage 862. More specifically, the entrance 861A is closer to the lower prize winning device 433 in the left-right direction of the front view of the gaming machine than the entrance 862A, and the gaming ball discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433 is the entrance. It is provided at a position where it can enter with a higher probability than 862A.

That is, among the game balls discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433, a relatively large number of game balls pass through the entrance 861A provided relatively near the lower prize winning device 433 and pass through the ball passage 861. On the other hand, a relatively small number of game balls enter the ball passage 862 via the entrance 862A provided relatively away from the lower prize winning device 433.

According to such a configuration, the game ball discharged to the player through the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433 is mainly a ball passage from the entrance 861A provided near the lower prize winning device 433 from the entrance 862A. If the entrance 861A cannot be entered while entering the 861, it is possible to give the impression of entering the entrance 862A provided at a distance from the lower prize winning device 433 than the entrance 861A.

As a result, when a game ball is launched aiming at entering the right ball passage 810, even if the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 cannot enter the upper prize winning device 434, the lower prize winning device 433 Many of the game balls ejected through the upper surface of the player can be made to feel as if they were guided by the lower right starting winning device 832 or the general winning device 439B.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game of launching the game ball aiming at the right ball passage 810. In addition, the disappointment of the player when the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 flows down without entering the upper prize winning device 434 is also suppressed.

In particular, the game balls that have reached the lower prize winning device 433 are rectified and flowed down in a row on the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433, so that the players are sequentially discharged one by one. By looking at the game balls, it is as if each of these game balls has entered either the ball passage 861 or the ball passage 862, that is, almost all of the game balls that have reached the lower prize winning device 433 are in the ball passage. It is easy to give the illusion of entering the 861 or the ball passage 862. As a result, it is possible to more preferably improve the interest of the game of launching the game ball aiming at the right ball passage 810, and the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 flows down without entering the upper prize winning device 434. The discouragement of the player in such a case can be suppressed more preferably.

Further, the probability that the game ball discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433 passes through the branch port 864 is lower than the probability of entering the entrance 861A or the probability of entering the entrance 862A. It is possible to prevent all of the game balls discharged through the upper surface of the lower large winning device 433 from entering the lower right starting winning device 832 or the general winning device 439B. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege (for example, a prize ball), so that it is possible to prevent the amusement park (hall) side from suffering a disadvantage due to the excessive privilege being given.

As the winning device that the game ball that has reached the lower large winning device 433 can enter, a winning device (that is, a lower right starting winning device 832 and a general winning device 439B) that give different benefits are provided. Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 reaches the lower prize winning device 433 without entering the upper prize winning device 434, the behavior of the game ball that is discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433. It is possible to make the player interested in the game, and in this respect as well, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game of launching the game ball aiming at the right ball passage 810.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the lower right start winning device 832 including the winning / failing lottery as a privilege is configured to reach with a higher probability than the general winning device 439B which does not include the winning / failing lottery as a privilege. Therefore, the gaming ball discharged through the upper surface of the lower large winning device 433 can easily enter the winning device (that is, the lower right starting winning device 832) that can give a higher value privilege. Therefore, also in this respect, the disappointment of the player when the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 flows down without entering the upper prize winning device 434 can be suitably suppressed, and the right ball passage 810 is provided. It is possible to improve the interest of the game of aiming and launching a game ball.

On the other hand, the lower right start winning device 832 can enter only when the entry is allowed, and when the approach is prohibited, the game ball passes in front of the lower right starting winning device 832 to the downstream side. And is discharged from the discharge port 401A. Therefore, not all the game balls that have entered the entrance 861A enter the lower right start winning device 832, so that it is possible to prevent the game hall (hall) side from suffering a disadvantage due to excessive granting of benefits. Further, it is possible to preferably suppress that the game becomes monotonous when the game ball that has entered the right ball passage 810 flows down without entering the upper prize winning device 434.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 23. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment, the game area on the right side of the game board 400 has a flow area that can be divided according to the firing intensity of the game ball (that is, the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252). The right flow down region 708 and the middle flow down region 709 were arranged side by side in the left-right direction (see FIG. 16).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of flow-down regions that can be separated according to the firing intensity of the game ball are provided so as to be overlapped in the front-rear direction in the front view of the game machine. In the following description, the same configurations as those in the first and second embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the structural configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 23A is a partially enlarged front view of the upper right side of the game board 400 in the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 23 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 400 in line AA of FIG. 23 (a).

Note that FIG. 23 shows a schematic outline of the main structures provided in the game area. Further, in FIG. 23 (b), the rear plate 223 arranged in front of the game board 400 so as to be visible is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. Further, in FIG. 23, for reference, a part of the game ball flowing down the game board 400 is shown, and a part of the flow-down route is shown by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 23 (a), a right upstream lower region 807 is continuously provided in the guide passage 711 that guides the game ball launched from the launching device 330 to the game region on the right side of the game board 400. In the lower right upstream region 807, a through hole 871 through which the game ball can pass back and forth is formed from the front side to the back side of the game board 400 (base 401). The through hole 871 is continuously provided on the upper end side of the rear flow area 808 formed on the back surface side of the game board 400.

The right upstream lower region 807 is continuously provided in the forward flow region 809 on the downstream side of the through hole 871. Therefore, the through hole 871 is not the front flow area 809 connected to the right upstream lower area 807 on the front side of the game board 400, but the back surface of the game board 400, instead of the game ball entering the right upstream lower area 807 from the guide passage 711. It functions as a branch port for branching to the backward flow area 808 provided on the side.

Immediately below the through hole 871 in the lower right upstream region 807, that is, below the through hole 871 on the axis passing substantially the center of the through hole 871 in the vertical direction, a nail 411 (which functions as a guiding member to the through hole 871) 411F) is erected. Although the details will be described later, when the game ball that has entered the lower right upstream region 807 properly contacts the nail 411F, the game ball that is bounced off by the nail 411F enters the through hole 871.

A through hole 872 is formed in the upper left of the upper right start winning device 731 so that the game ball can pass back and forth with respect to the game board 400 (base 401). The through hole 872 is continuously provided on the lower end side of the rear flow area 808 formed on the back surface side of the game board 400, and functions as an outlet of the rear flow area 808.

Further, the through hole 872 is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the front flow area 809 can come into contact with the game ball discharged from the rear flow area 808 through the through hole 872. Although the details will be described later, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the former game ball (that is, the former game ball (that is,) by bringing the game ball flowing down the forward flow area 809 into contact with the game ball discharged from the through hole 872. , A game ball that has flowed down the rearward flow area 808) can enter the upper right start winning device 731.

Immediately below the through hole 872, that is, below the through hole 872 on the axis passing substantially the center of the through hole 872 in the vertical direction, the through hole 872 projects forward from the front surface of the game board 400 (base 401). A protruding member 873 that temporarily supports the game ball discharged from the lower side is provided.

As shown in FIG. 23B, the rearward flow region 808 is formed from a space formed between the back surface of the game board 400 (base 401) and the groove portion of the passage forming member 881 arranged on the back surface side. It is composed. As shown in FIG. 23A, the rear flow-down region 808 has a flow path portion having the same shape as the front flow-down region 809, and the flow path portion is in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine with respect to the front flow-down region 809. It is provided so as to overlap.

Next, the flow-down mode of the game ball in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. When the game ball that has entered the upper right upper lower region 807 through the guide passage 711 comes into contact with the nail 411F, it flows down by a flow path according to how it comes into contact with the nail 411F.

For example, when the game ball that has entered the lower right upstream area 807 comes into contact with the upper left side of the cross section passing through the axial center of the nail 411F, the game ball nail is repelled to the left by the nail 411F, so that the game ball P5, for example, It enters the forward flow area 809 through the left side of the nail 411F and flows down the forward flow area 809.

Further, when the game ball that has entered the upper right upstream lower region 807 comes into contact with the upper right side in the cross section passing through the axial center of the nail 411F, the game ball nail is repelled to the right by the nail 411F, so that, for example, the game ball P6. It enters the forward flow area 809 through the right side of the nail 411F and flows down the forward flow area 809.

On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the upper right upstream lower region 807 comes into contact with the nail 411F from substantially directly above the nail 411F, the game ball is repelled by the nail 411F toward the through hole 871 located directly above the nail 411F. At this time, when the game ball enters the through hole 871, the game ball enters the rear flow area 808 through the through hole 871 and flows down the rear flow area 808. That is, the game ball that has entered the lower right upstream region 807 can enter the through hole 871 when it appropriately contacts the nail 411F.

The contact position of the nail 411F with respect to the game ball can be adjusted by using, for example, the recoil prevention member 805 provided at the tip on the upper right side of the outer rail 402. Like the recoil prevention member 405 (see FIG. 14), the recoil prevention member 805 is a member formed of a material such as vibration damping rubber, and passes through the guide passage 711 as shown in FIG. 23A. A surface on which the game ball can come into contact (hereinafter, this surface is referred to as a "contactable surface") is arranged so as to stand in the vertical direction.

When a game ball (for example, a game ball P3) heading for the game area on the right side through the guide passage 711 comes into contact (collision) with the contactable surface of the recoil prevention member 805, the game ball is brought into contact with the rebound prevention member 805 by the recoil prevention member 805. It bounces a little to the left. The stronger the collision, the more the game ball that collides with the recoil prevention member 805 is bounced to the left side. Therefore, the contact position of the game ball with respect to the nail 411F can be changed according to the degree of collision with the recoil prevention member 805. ..

That is, the weaker the degree of collision with the recoil prevention member 805, the weaker the rebound of the game ball by the recoil prevention member 805. Therefore, for example, the degree of the collision is the weakest and the rebound prevention member 805 is substantially on the contactable surface. When flowing down along the trajectory, the game ball can be brought into contact with the upper left side of the cross section passing through the axial center of the nail 411F.

The stronger the degree of collision with the recoil prevention member 805, the greater the bounce of the game ball to the left side. Therefore, as the degree of collision increases, the game ball is moved from almost directly above the nail 411F to the nail 411F. It becomes possible to make contact, and further, the game ball can be brought into contact with the upper right side in the cross section passing through the axial center of the nail 411F.

As described above, the game ball that has entered the upper right upstream lower region 807 flows down in a flow path according to the contact position of the game ball with respect to the nail 411F. Therefore, by adjusting the degree of collision of the game ball with the recoil prevention member 805, the degree of collision of the game ball with the recoil prevention member 805 can be adjusted. The flow path of the game ball can be adjusted. On the other hand, the degree of collision of the game ball with the recoil prevention member 805 can be adjusted according to the launch intensity of the game ball, so that the player can adjust the amount of rotation of the launch handle 252 to move forward. It is possible to allow the game ball to flow down in the flow-down area intended by itself in the flow-down area 809 or the backward flow-down area 808.

Further, the nail 411F is separated from the position where the game ball bounced off by the recoil prevention member 805 can first contact, that is, the outer rail 402 which is a member that limits the traveling direction of the game ball upward by the firing force. By providing the game ball that has advanced downward at a position where it can first contact, the probability of entering the through hole 871 according to the firing strength of the game ball (that is, the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 252 by the player). Can be changed efficiently.

Even if the game ball does not collide with the recoil prevention member 805, it can be changed according to the contact position of the game ball with respect to the nail 411F. In that case, the weaker the firing strength of the game ball, the more the game ball can be brought into contact with the upper right side of the cross section passing through the axial center of the nail 411F, and as the firing strength of the game ball increases, it is almost directly above the nail 411F. It is possible to bring the game ball into contact with the nail 411F. Therefore, also in this respect, the player can make the game ball flow down in the flow-down area intended by himself / herself in the front flow-down area 809 or the backward flow-down area 808 by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 252. It is possible.

As shown in FIG. 23 (b), the game ball that has entered the rearward flow region 808 from the through hole 871 is rectified by the protrusions 881A to 881D formed on the game board 400 (base 401) and the passage forming member 881. It flows down the back surface side of the game board 400 and is guided from the through hole 872 to the upper surface 873A of the projecting member 873, so that it is discharged to the front side of the game board 400.

As shown in FIG. 23A, the protruding member 873 is configured such that the upper surface 873A is inclined downward toward the left in the front view of the gaming machine. Therefore, the gaming ball (for example, the gaming ball P7) discharged from the through hole 872 falls from the left side of the protruding member 873 according to the shape of the upper surface 873A in the front view of the gaming machine when it is not interfered by other gaming balls. , Flows down through the left side of the upper right start winning device 731.

On the other hand, the game ball that flows down the front flow area 809 without entering the through hole 871 flows down the front side of the game board 400 by a path that passes through the left side of the upper right start winning device 731. The game ball flowing down the forward flow-down area 809 can come into contact with the game ball (for example, the game ball P7) on the projecting member 873, for example, the game ball P8. When the game ball flowing down the front flow area 809 comes into contact with the game ball on the projecting member 873, the latter game ball (that is, the game ball on the projecting member 873 discharged from the through hole 872) is brought into contact with the projecting member 873. When falling from the right side, the game ball enters the upper right start winning device 731.

In the front flow area 809 and the rear flow area 808, respectively, when the game ball continuously launched from the launching device 330 first enters the rear flow area 808 and then enters the front flow area 809, the forward flow area 809 The game ball flowing down the region 809 is configured to have a length that allows it to come into contact with the game ball discharged from the through hole 872 through the rearward flowing down region 808.

Therefore, the player launches the game ball from the launching device 330 with a firing intensity within a predetermined strength range capable of entering the through hole 871, and then continuously launches the subsequent game ball after the game ball within the predetermined strength range. By launching from the launcher 330 with a higher launch intensity and a launch intensity that allows the game ball to flow down the forward flow area 809 without entering the through hole 871, the game ball enters the upper right start winning device 731 (winning). It becomes possible to make it. That is, the entry of the game ball into the upper right start winning device 731 is possible by the player intentionally adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 252 as described above.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the upper surface 873A of the protruding member 873 is formed in a curved shape in which the central side is slightly lower than the end in the front-rear direction in the side view. .. Therefore, the game ball (for example, the game ball P7) discharged from the through hole 872 is moved to the front side (that is, the side approaching the rear plate 223) along the upper surface 873A, and then moved to the rear side again to move back and forth. It can be made to swing in a direction.

As a result, it is possible to secure a relatively long time for the game ball discharged from the through hole 872 to stay on the protruding member 873 (upper surface 873A). The probability of contacting the upper game ball can be increased.

Further, as described above, the game ball that has entered the rearward flow area 808 from the through hole 871 flows down while being rectified by the protrusions 881A to 881D, so that the behavior of the game ball discharged from the through hole 872 is kept stable. be able to. As a result, the time for the game ball discharged from the through hole 872 to stay on the projecting member 873 can be kept substantially uniform when it is not interfered by other game balls, so that the forward flow region 809 can be set. It is possible to prevent the probability that the flowing game ball comes into contact with the game ball on the projecting member 873 from fluctuating significantly each time.

Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the right upstream lower region 807 from the guide passage 711 flows down either the front flow region 809 or the rear flow region 808 that branches in the right upstream lower region 807. The through hole 871 formed in the right upstream lower region 807 functions as a branch port between the front flow region 809 and the rear flow region 808, and the probability of entering the through hole 871 depends on the launch intensity of the game ball. Since it can be adjusted by adjusting the state of contact between the nail and the nail 411F, the player can adjust the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252 to determine the intention of the forward flow area 809 or the rear flow area 808. The game ball can be flowed down in the flow-down area.

The two flow areas (ie, forward flow area 809 and backward flow area 808) that the player can aim at by adjusting the amount of rotation with respect to the launch handle 252 are one of the flow areas (rear flow area 808). ) Is provided so as to overlap the other flow-down area (forward flow-down area 809) in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine.

When the two branching flow areas are provided so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine, both of the two branching flow areas are provided on the front side of the game board 400 (base 401) (for example, FIG. 16). Compared to the right flow area 708 and the middle flow area 709) shown in the above, the area occupied by the flow area on the front side of the game board 400 can be suppressed, and therefore, a display unit such as the decorative symbol display device 479 can be suppressed accordingly. In addition, it is possible to secure a larger area for arranging movable members for production. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably utilize the limited area of the game board 400.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in order to allow the game ball to enter the upper right start winning device 731, the game ball is launched from the launching device 330 with a firing intensity within a predetermined strength range capable of entering the through hole 871. After launching, the game ball succeeding the game ball with a firing intensity stronger than the predetermined strength range and flowing down the forward flow area 809 without the game ball entering the through hole 871. It is necessary to launch from the launcher 330.

Therefore, in order to allow the game ball to enter the upper right start winning device 731, it is necessary for the player to intentionally adjust the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 252, so that the game ball is launched from the launch device 330. The monotony of the game can be reduced. Further, in order to allow the game ball to enter the upper right start winning device 731, the skill of the player is also required to some extent, and in that respect as well, the monotony of the game performed by launching the game ball from the launching device 330 is made. It can be mitigated.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the above embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the above embodiment.

(1) In the first embodiment, when the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 are reached through the middle flow down region 409, the launching device is more than when passing through the right flow down region 408. Although it is configured to be delayed by the same time as the shortest firing interval in 330, it is not always necessary to delay by the same time as the shortest firing interval. For example, it may be configured to be delayed in the range of 3/4 to 5/4 of the shortest firing interval, or may be delayed in the range of 1/2 to 3/4 of the shortest firing interval. Even with these configurations, as compared with the case where both the preceding game ball and the succeeding game ball reach the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 through the right flow down region 408 or the middle flow down region 409. The upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device is detected by detecting either the game ball flowing down through the middle flow down area 409 or the game ball flowing down through the right flow down area 408 by the upper prize winning switch 444 or the lower prize winning switch 443. Before the 433 changes to the entry prohibited state, it is highly possible that both of these game balls can enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433. As the delay time approaches the shortest firing interval, both the game ball that has flowed down through the middle flow area 409 and the game ball that has flowed down through the right flow area 408 are allowed to enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433. The probability of being able to do it is high. Further, it may be configured to delay by a predetermined time longer than 3/2 of the shortest firing interval. In this case, a configuration in which the player can know the timing of launching the next game ball so as to flow down the right flow area 408, for example, a mark is placed on a predetermined portion of the guide passage 424 to mark the mark. When the game ball approaches the designated part, the next game ball is launched so as to flow down the right flow area 408, and the timing of launching the next game ball is notified by the decorative symbol display device 479. Is preferable.

(2) In the first embodiment, the operation timing of the operation required to enjoy the privilege is indirectly notified by the number of waiting for entry in the decorative symbol display device 479, and the specific timing is set by the player. The configuration is determined, but it is not necessary to have such a configuration. For example, when a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls) of game balls enter the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433, the player is notified to change the launch strength so that the game balls flow down through the middle flow lower region 409. At the same time, immediately after that, a notification may be made to return the launch strength to the maximum strength so that the game ball flows down through the right flow area 408, so that a specific operation timing may be notified. In addition, when notifying a specific timing, all the game balls (for example, 2 balls) that have already been launched when a predetermined number of game balls enter the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 are above. Since it is premised that the ball enters the grand prize device 434 or the lower prize device 433, the game ball that flows down through the right flow down region 408 or the middle flow down region 409 in the middle flow down region is the upper grand prize device 434 or the lower grand prize. It is particularly preferred to apply to configurations that enter device 433 reliably or with a very high probability (95% or higher).

(3) In the first embodiment, the arrival at the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 is delayed when passing through the middle flow down region 409 as compared with the case where passing through the right flow down region 408. However, it is not always necessary to delay the case of passing through the midstream down region 409. For example, the configuration may be such that when passing through the middle flow down region 409, it is faster than when passing through the right flow down region 408. However, in the case of this configuration, it is necessary to launch the game ball so as to flow down through the right flow down area 408, and then launch the next game ball so as to flow down through the middle flow down area 409. As for the time to advance, it is preferable to accelerate within the range of 1/2 to 3/4 of the shortest firing interval, and 3/4 to 5/4 of the shortest firing interval, as in the case of delaying above. It is more preferable to accelerate in the range, and it is most preferable to accelerate by the same time as the shortest firing interval.

(4) In the first embodiment, the number of game balls, which is "1" less than the specified number, is allowed to flow down through the right flow area 408 until it enters the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433. The game ball is launched, and then the game ball is launched so as to flow down through the middle flow area 409, and then the game ball is launched again so as to flow down through the right flow area 408. It is not necessary to have a configuration that adjusts the launch in such three stages. For example, in the case of delaying the arrival of the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433 when passing through the middle flow lower region 409, the number of game balls that is "1" less than the specified number is the upper prize. The game ball is launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down area 409 until it enters the device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433, and then the next game ball is launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down area 409, and then it flows down to the right. A game ball may be launched so as to flow down through the area 408. Further, for example, in the case of accelerating the arrival at the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 when passing through the middle flow lower region 409, the number of game balls which is "1" less than the specified number is above. After launching the game ball so that it flows down through the middle flow down area 409 until it enters the large prize device 434 and the lower grand prize device 433, once the game ball is launched so as to flow down through the right flow down area 408, and then again in the middle. The next game ball may be launched so as to flow down through the flow down area 409. In addition, until the number of game balls, which is "1" less than the specified number, enters the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433, the game balls are launched so as to flow down through the right flow area 408, and further, the game balls flow down to the right. After launching the game ball so as to flow down through the region 408, the game ball may be launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down region 409.

(5) In the first embodiment, the game balls entering the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 are configured to be two balls at substantially the same time, but the configuration does not necessarily have to be two balls. .. For example, in addition to the right flow area 408 and the middle flow area 409, at least one new flow area different from the left flow area 407 is formed, and through each of the right flow area 408, the middle flow area 409, and the new flow area. The configuration may be such that three or more game balls that have flowed down are promoted to enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 at substantially the same time.

(6) In the first embodiment, the game ball launched so as to flow down through the middle flow area 409 and the game ball launched so as to flow down through the right flow area 408 are substantially simultaneously large. It is configured to increase the possibility of entering the winning device 434 and the lower winning device 433, but the game balls that have flowed down through different flow areas may enter the upper winning device 434 and the lower winning device 433 almost at the same time. It is not necessary to have a configuration that increases. For example, it may be configured to increase the possibility that two game balls launched so as to flow down through the middle flow down region 409 enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 at substantially the same time.

Here, this configuration will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a partially enlarged front view of a modified example of the game board. The game board 400 shown in FIG. 15 is provided with a route switching mechanism 425 between the upper parallel passage portion 424C and the lower parallel passage portion 424D arranged so as to be arranged vertically in the guide passage 424. The route switching mechanism 425 provides a delay guide so as to form a path that short-circuits the delay guide passage plate 425A forming the bottom surface of the upper parallel passage portion 424C and the upper parallel passage portion 424C and the lower parallel passage portion 424D. A rotation control mechanism unit (not shown) that rotates the passage plate 425A by approximately 90 degrees is provided. On the upper surface of the delay guide passage plate 425A, a guide groove (not shown) that bends in the front-rear direction is formed so that the game ball flowing down the guide passage 424 flows down so as to pass through the guide passage 424 in a time of about 1 second. There is. Further, when two game balls flow down on the delay guide passage plate 425A, the rotation control mechanism unit rotates the delay guide passage plate 425A by the own weight of the two game balls, and the rotation causes the two game balls. The game ball is discharged to the lower parallel passage portion 424D. When such a route switching mechanism 425 is provided, when two game balls are launched at the shortest firing interval so as to flow down through the middle flow down region 409, the time for the game balls to pass over the delay guide passage plate 425A. Is longer than the shortest firing interval, so that the following game ball enters the delayed guidance aisle plate 425A before the preceding game ball finishes passing over the delayed guidance aisle plate 425A. As a result, the preceding game ball and the succeeding game ball are discharged to the lower parallel passage portion 424D, and the flow of the guide passage 424 is continued at least at intervals equal to or less than the length of the delay guide passage plate 425A. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that those two game balls enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 at substantially the same time.

(7) In the first embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be obtained as a privilege is increased by adjusting the rotation operation amount of a predetermined firing handle (adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball) by the player in the special gaming state. Although the configuration is such that the number of prize balls can be increased, the privilege does not necessarily have to be an increase in the number of prize balls. For example, even if a game ball exceeding the specified number enters the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize winning device 433, only the number of prize balls when the specified number of game balls enter them is given, and the specified number is given as a privilege. It is also possible to increase the chances of appreciating a special effect in the ending effect according to the number of times the exceeding game ball enters the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower prize device 433. Further, the configuration may be such that the privilege of increasing the number of prize balls and the privilege of increasing the viewing opportunity of the special production can be combined and enjoyed.

(8) In the first embodiment, the discharge port 424B of the guide passage 424 is formed on the upper left side of the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433, but it is not necessarily the upper prize winning device 434 or the lower college. It does not have to be formed in the vicinity of the winning device 433. For example, a guide passage for discharging to the upper left of the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol may be formed so that the two game balls can be promoted to enter the upper prize winning device 434 and the lower prize winning device 433 at substantially the same time. .. Further, the game ball that has flowed down through the middle flow area 409 is released so as to interfere (collide) with the game ball that has flowed down through the right flow area 408, and due to these interferences, the game ball that has flowed down through the right flow area 408 is released. The configuration may be such that the entry into the starting device 436 can be promoted.

When the number of branches of the flow path of the game ball is set to be small in the right flow area 408, or when the mode of repulsion when contacting an obstacle member is set to be constant, the game balls fired continuously. Although the flow time to reach the upper prize winning device 434 etc. is constant, the interference between the game balls is reduced, so that the start port of the start device 436 is used when the game balls flow down alone. If the setting is such that the game ball hardly or not enters the winning opening, the player may not be able to deal with it and may be dissatisfied with the game machine. On the other hand, as described above, if the game ball that has flowed down through the middle flow down region 409 is discharged to the upstream side from the start port and the winning port of the start device 436, the interference of the game ball is controlled by the player. Can be generated by. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with benefits such as increasing the number of unit games and increasing the number of prize balls by varying the probability of entering the starting port and the winning port.

(9) In the second embodiment, both the unit game related to the first special symbol and the unit game related to the second special symbol are in an advantageous fluctuation state when the special game state by winning the big hit lottery ends. Although the game state is changed, the unit game related to the first special symbol may be changed to the advantageous fluctuation state after the end of the special game state due to the winning of the big hit lottery.

In such a configuration, when a long fluctuation occurrence condition occurs due to the game ball entering the upper right start winning device 731 during the special gaming state, it is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the upper right starting winning device 731. The period during which the fluctuation display of the unit game related to the first special symbol (that is, the unit game last held and stored at the timing when the long fluctuation occurrence condition occurs) is longer than the fluctuation time predetermined for the fluctuation display. However, it may be configured to be executed with a variable time of a specific period (for example, 5 minutes) that allows the player to take a break away from the pachinko machine 100.

As a result, the fixed stop timing (that is, the display timing of the stop symbol) in the variable display of the unit game related to the first special symbol can be delayed from the initial timing, and as a result, the jackpot lottery of the unit game is won. If so, the timing of occurrence of the special gaming state can be delayed. Therefore, since the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can also be delayed, even in such a configuration, it is possible to leave the pachinko machine 100 without abandoning the privilege in the advantageous fluctuation state (that is, the probability of occurrence of a relatively high jackpot). Become.

Further, in the advantageous fluctuation state, the starting prize for operating the lower prize winning device 433 may be limited to the starting prize related to the second special symbol. In this way, even when the number of unit games of the second special symbol that can be executed in the advantageous fluctuation state is set to an upper limit, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, the privilege in the advantageous fluctuation state is abandoned. It is possible to move away from the pachinko machine 100 without having to do so.

(10) In the second embodiment, the upper right start winning device 731 is provided on the right side of the game board 400 instead of the winning combination operating device 435, but instead of the upper right starting winning device 731, the winning combination The operation device 435 may be provided, or the lower prize winning device 433 may start operating when the game ball passes through the combination operation device 435, or the game ball may operate the combination operation device 435 for a certain period of time. It is assumed that the lower prize winning device 433 starts operating when it does not pass, and when the game ball passes through the combination operating device 435, the lower prize is lowered at the timing when a certain time (for example, 1 minute) elapses after the passage. The winning device 433 may start operating, and when a plurality of game balls are passed, a few minutes have passed (for example, 5 minutes when five game balls have been passed). Later, the lower prize winning device 433 may start operating. Alternatively, instead of the upper right start winning device 731, a game ball that is an operating device different from the winning combination operating device 435 and that has entered from the upstream side like the winning combination operating device 435 is placed on the back side of the game board 400. A gate-shaped operating device that flows down on the game board 400 without being guided may be provided, and a long fluctuation generation condition may be satisfied when the game ball passes through the operating device. In this case, the operating device functions as a device that delays the fixed stop timing in the variable display of the unit game from the initial timing, or delays the occurrence timing of the special gaming state unlike the combination operating device 435. ..

(11) In the second embodiment, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the fluctuation display of the unit game to be executed next time is displayed in a period longer than the fluctuation time predetermined for the fluctuation display. Therefore, it was configured to be executed with a fluctuation time of a specific period (for example, 5 minutes) that allows the player to take a break away from the pachinko machine 100. The unit game for displaying the fluctuation is the unit game to be executed next time if at least one unit game is targeted among all the unit games held and stored at the timing when the long fluctuation occurrence condition occurs. It doesn't have to be. For example, among all the unit games held and stored at the timing when the long fluctuation occurrence condition occurs, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the unit game held and stored last may be set as a specific period. Further, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display may be set as a specific period for a plurality of unit games held and stored at the timing when the long fluctuation occurrence condition occurs.

(12) In the second embodiment, the long fluctuation generation condition is satisfied by allowing the game ball to enter the upper right start winning device 731 during the special game state, and thereby the timing at which the long fluctuation generation condition occurs. One of the unit games held and stored in the above is configured so that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is set as a specific period, but the game ball that has entered the upper right start winning device 731 after the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied. Depending on the number of times, the number of game units whose variable time is a specific period may be increased.

(13) In the second embodiment, the number of times the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is held is one, and the number of times the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is held is four times. In this case, the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, but when the number of times the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is held reaches four times, a predetermined notification may be given. The player can recognize that the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol has reached four times by such notification.

When the advantageous fluctuation state ends and the gaming state returns to the normal gaming state, the player can change the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning from the right-handed gaming method aiming at the game area on the right side of the game board 400. The game is performed by switching to the left-handed game method aiming at the device 431B. When the game ball is launched by the right-handed game method, the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol generated based on the game ball entering the right-starting winning device 432 is likely to be reserved.

Therefore, the number of times the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is held may have reached 4 times at the timing when the game state returns to the normal game state, and in such a case, by switching to the left-handed game method. When the game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B, the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied even though there is no reason to lengthen the fluctuation display of the unit game, and the unit game changes. The display will be executed for a specific period of time.

On the other hand, when the number of times the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is held reaches four times, the player can grasp that fact by giving a predetermined notification, thereby. It is possible to switch to the left-handed game method after waiting for the unit game related to the second special symbol stored on hold to be digested (processed) so that the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid the player from wasting time due to unnecessary delays.

When the number of times the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is held reaches four, the main control board 920 outputs the corresponding signal to the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 receives the received signal. Based on the above, a predetermined notification is executed by using a decorative symbol display device 479, an acoustic device 281,282, or the like. As a predetermined notification, the decorative symbol display device 479 displays a content indicating that the number of times the unit game right related to the second special symbol has been held has reached four, a content prompting the game ball to stop firing, and the like. It may be a configuration that can be reported by voice or the like.

(14) In the second embodiment, the case where the long variation generation condition is satisfied during the special gaming state is illustrated, but the long variation generation condition may be configured to be satisfied even in the normal gaming state.

(15) In the second embodiment, when the long fluctuation generation condition is satisfied, the pachinko machine 100 has a predetermined screen display that makes the player feel as if the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized (reset), or the pachinko machine 100. An image that can reset the player's feelings, such as a predetermined screen display that makes the player feel as if he / she has entered the standby state, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. However, these screen displays (that is, the image) Instead of (display), or in addition to these screen displays, the player's feelings may be reset by controlling the voice.

For example, when the condition for generating long fluctuations is satisfied, the sound is first muted (silenced), and then the fluctuation display in the unit game is started internally, and characters such as "resetting" are displayed on the turned-off background. After a predetermined time (for example, a time that the remaining fluctuation time is about 30 seconds) elapses, the original fluctuation display including voice is restored, and the player leaves the fluctuation display from the pachinko machine 100. It may be configured to be executed over a specific period (for example, 5 minutes) that enables the user to take a break. By making the sound silent during the display period of "resetting", the player is likely to receive the illusion that the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized. In addition, instead of changing the volume, or in addition to changing the volume, the content of the sound may be changed.

In addition, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the fluctuation display of the unit game including the display of "resetting" as described above is performed at the initial fluctuation time, and after the fixed stop in the unit game is performed. , A pseudo-variable display starting with a predetermined symbol (eg 1, 2, 3) is performed over a specific period (eg, 5 minutes) that allows the player to take a break away from the pachinko machine 100. It may be configured. In this way, by newly performing a pseudo fluctuation display from a predetermined symbol (for example, 1, 2, 3), the pachinko machine 100 is initialized, and it seems as if some change is occurring internally. The illusion can be easily felt by the player.

(16) In the second embodiment, when the long fluctuation generation condition is satisfied, the pachinko machine 100 is initially set by operating the power switch 909 or the initialization switch 907 as an image in which the player's feelings can be reset. The initial screen that is actually displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 as a result of being reset is illustrated, but the operation of the accessory that attempts to initialize when the pachinko machine 100 is initialized (reset) is shown. , It may be configured to be performed in addition to the display of the initial screen. As a result, the player is more likely to receive the illusion that the pachinko machine 100 has been initialized.

(17) In the second embodiment, the player intentionally adjusts the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 252 and causes the game ball to enter the upper right start winning device 731, thereby satisfying the long variation generation condition. An image capable of resetting the player's feelings is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, but at a position where the player playing the pachinko machine 100 can operate (for example, the front side of the pachinko machine 100). , A dedicated operation unit (for example, a button, a lever, etc.) for displaying an image that can reset the player's feelings may be provided.

In such a configuration, the establishment of the long variation occurrence condition may be established regardless of the operation on the dedicated operation unit. In addition, by providing a dedicated operation unit, an image that can reset the player's feelings according to the player's needs regardless of the game state such as the normal game state as well as the special game state. Can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479.

(18) In the second embodiment, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, an image that can reset the player's feelings is displayed in the next unit game including the fluctuation display for a specific period. An image that can reset the player's feelings may be displayed after the end of the next unit game.

(19) In the second embodiment, the game ball is flowed down to the right flow down area 708 and the middle flow down area 709 to perform a firing operation in which the two game balls come into contact with each other, so that the game ball is moved to the upper right start winning device 731. Although the configuration in which the two game balls can enter (win) is described, the configuration in which the launch operation in which the two game balls come into contact is not limited to the configuration of the right flow down region 708 and the middle flow down region 709, for example. It may have the configuration of the right flow down region 408 and the middle flow down region 409 in the first embodiment. Further, instead of the configuration of the right flow down region 408 and the middle flow down region 409 in the first embodiment, the configuration of the right flow down region 708 and the middle flow down region 709 in the second embodiment may be provided.

(20) In the second embodiment, the number of times the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is held is one, and the number of times the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is held is four times. By setting the case as a long fluctuation occurrence condition, the player can take a break away from the pachinko machine 100 without abandoning the privilege in the advantageous fluctuation state (that is, the probability of occurrence of a relatively high jackpot). However, from the viewpoint that the player can easily leave his / her seat safely, the player may hold the unit game right related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of the number of times the player holds the right. The long fluctuation generation condition may be configured when the game ball is entered into a specific entry port or winning opening such as the upper right start winning device 731. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily generate a situation in which the player is safely left from his / her seat.

Further, a dedicated operation unit (for example, a button, a lever, etc.) for generating a long fluctuation generation condition is provided at a position where the player playing the pachinko machine 100 can operate (for example, the front side of the pachinko machine 100). It may be configured. In such a configuration, the establishment of the long variation occurrence condition may be established regardless of the operation on the dedicated operation unit. Further, by providing the dedicated operation unit, the player can operate the dedicated operation unit as needed to generate a situation in which the player can safely leave the seat at any time.

Further, a long fluctuation occurrence condition may be set when a situation occurs in which a predetermined number or more of prize balls (game value) can be paid out from the payout device 540 in a short period of time. A player is more likely to have a sense of gambling because a situation occurs in which a predetermined number or more of prize balls can be paid out in a short period of time. By giving an opportunity to temporarily leave the seat during the fluctuation display of, it is possible to calm the player who has become enthusiastic and enthusiastic.

Even in such a case, the player can be relieved to leave the seat by displaying the information J that allows the player to leave the seat when the fluctuation display for a specific period is performed based on the establishment of the long fluctuation occurrence condition. Since it can be encouraged, it is preferable in that it gives the player an opportunity to calm down.

As an example of "a situation in which a predetermined number or more of prize balls (game value) can be paid out from the payout device 540 in a short period of time", for example, "a plurality of predetermined times (for example, 10 minutes) in a short period (for example, 10 minutes)". When a special gaming state (3 times) occurs ”is an example.

When the long variation occurrence condition is satisfied in "when a plurality of special gaming states occur in a short period of time", the special gaming states are continuously generated following the special gaming states that are continuously generated. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) in the case is set to a specific period determined based on the fluctuation time of the normal (that is, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not satisfied) jackpot fluctuation, and the fluctuation display (big hit) of the specific period is set. It may be configured to perform (variation).

Alternatively, when the long variation occurrence condition is satisfied in "when a plurality of special gaming states occur in a short period of time", the predetermined number of times (once or once) is executed after the special gaming states that occur consecutively. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display for (multiple times) may be a specific period determined based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not satisfied, and the fluctuation display of the specific period may be performed. It should be noted that the fluctuation display, which is regarded as a specific period in such a case, is not limited to the loss fluctuation, and may include the jackpot fluctuation.

Further, as "a situation in which a predetermined number or more of prize balls (game value) can be paid out from the payout device 540 in a short period of time", for example, "a predetermined number or more (for example, approximately 2000 or more) games are played at one time". After a special game state in which the value can be paid out (so-called a lot of balls) occurs, if the player wins the big hit lottery of the unit game related to the special symbol within a short period of time ”, this condition is also illustrated. Instead of the condition when the above-mentioned special gaming state occurs a predetermined number of times, or in addition to the condition, a long variation occurrence condition may be used. Here, the "special game state in which a predetermined number or more of game values can be paid out at one time" is, for example, a long-term (for example, 10 rounds) special game state in which a large number of continuous rounds can be played. Is.

In addition, as a "short period" after a "special game state in which a predetermined number or more of game values can be paid out (so-called many balls)" occurs, for example, the variable display is displayed a predetermined number of times (so-called, many balls are thrown out). For example, a period until the loss reach is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) and a period until the loss reach is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) are exemplified.

Then, the condition for generating long fluctuations is "when a special game state in which a predetermined number or more of game values can be paid out at one time occurs, and then a big hit lottery for a unit game related to a special symbol is won within a short period of time". If is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) corresponding to the winning jackpot lottery shall be the specific period determined based on the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is not satisfied, and the specific period It may be configured to display fluctuations (big hit fluctuations).

If a predetermined number or more (for example, about 5,000 or more) of prize balls can be paid out in a short period of time (for example, 10 minutes), the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied regardless of the occurrence of the special gaming state. It may be configured to be used.

(21) In the second embodiment, the information J for leaving the seat is displayed when the fluctuation display for a specific period is performed based on the establishment of the condition for generating the long fluctuation. However, the information J for leaving the seat is decorated. The information is not limited to visually recognizable information such as a character string displayed on the symbol display device 479, and may be configured to be reported by voice or the like using an acoustic device 281,282 or the like.

(22) In the third embodiment, the right ball passage 810 is configured as a constricted passage in the right middle passage portion 810B, but the right middle passage portion 810B is combined with the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810C. Similarly, it may be configured as a thick passage portion including a plurality of flow paths (for example, three or more flow paths) arranged in the left-right direction. In such a modified example, although the effect of changing the flow of the game ball flowing down the passage portions 810A, 810B, 810C as in the third embodiment is small, the player can use the right middle passage portion 810B. Since it is difficult to identify the flow path of the game ball in the upper right passage portion 810A and the lower right passage portion 810C to be sandwiched, the line of sight of the player is dispersed, and thereby the game ball has entered the branch passage 820 in the right middle passage portion 810B. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not it is.

(23) In the third embodiment, the passage portion includes three flow paths, but the number of flow paths arranged in the left-right direction is the number of passages including a plurality of flow paths arranged in the left-right direction. May be two or four or more.

(24) In the third embodiment, the right ball passage 810 is provided in the game area on the right side, but a ball passage having the same shape as the right ball passage 810 may be provided in the game area on the left side. In such a case, a branch passage similar to the branch passage 820 may be provided on the left end side of the ball passage.

(25) In the third embodiment, the general winning device 439C is provided in the lower right passage portion 810C, but the general winning device 439C may not be provided in the lower right passage portion 810C. That is, all of the game balls that have entered the lower right passage portion 810C when the upper prize winning device 434 is in the entry allowable state may be configured to be able to enter the upper prize winning device 434.

(26) In the third embodiment, the upper prize winning device 434 is configured so that the game ball can enter through the entrance having a width approximately 5 times the diameter of the game ball in the entry allowed state. The width of the entrance of the device 434 is not limited to the above example, and is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment as long as it is at least approximately twice or more, preferably approximately three times or more that of the game ball. It is possible to produce an effect.

(27) In the third embodiment, a row of nails (nail 411B, 411C, 411D) in which the boundary between the right middle passage portion 810B and the lower right passage portion 810C is inclined downward toward the branch port to the branch passage 820 is provided. The structure is formed by a row of nails including the row of nails), but the entrance to the lower right passage portion 810C may be provided on the downstream side of the row of nails that incline downward toward the branch port to the branch passage 820. .. That is, the boundary between the nail row, the right middle passage portion 810B, and the lower right passage portion 810C may be different.

(28) In the third embodiment, the game ball that has entered the branch passage 820 from the branch port formed in the right middle passage portion 810B is discharged into the game area through the branch passage 820. , The game ball that has entered the branch port formed in the right middle passage portion 810B may be guided to the collection / discharge passage through a predetermined passage.

(29) In the third embodiment, the case where most of the branch passage 820 overlaps the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction except for the vicinity of the branch port to the branch passage 820 has been illustrated. All of the branch passages 820, including the branch port of the above, may be configured to overlap the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction.

(30) In the third embodiment, most of the branch passage 820 overlaps the front decorative body 210 in the front-rear direction, but the portion that overlaps the branch passage 820 in the front-rear direction is the front decorative body. Not limited to the part where the back side cannot be seen from the front side like 210, but it is difficult to see the back side from the front side like a dark color (for example, black) transparent plate, but it is thin. It may be a part that can be visually recognized.

(31) In the third embodiment, a part of the front decorative body 210 that overlaps in the front-rear direction with respect to the vicinity of the branch port to the branch passage 820 is configured by the right edge portion 211E (see FIG. 5) as a light emitting portion. Although the case where this is performed has been described, the front decorative body 210 may have a non-light emitting portion that does not emit light in the portion overlapping in the vicinity of the branch port to the branch passage 820, whereby the player can enter the branch passage 820. It is preferable because it makes it easier to avoid paying attention to the branch port.

(32) In the third embodiment, the outer edge of the opening 210A of the front decorative body 210 overlapping in the front-rear direction with respect to the vicinity of the branch port to the branch passage 820 is formed linearly, and the branch port to the branch passage 820 is formed. The case where the right edge portion 211E (see FIG. 5) as a part of the front decorative body 210 overlapping in the front-rear direction with respect to the vicinity of the above is configured by substantially the same left and right width has been described, but the branch port to the branch passage 820 has been described. It is preferable that the portion overlapping in the vicinity of the portion is formed to have a width narrower to the left and right than at least one side of the upper side or the lower side with respect to the portion. Of the right edge portion 211E of the front decorative body 210, the narrow left-right width portion is difficult to arrange a passage on the rear side, and is a portion corresponding to a position significantly deviated from the center in the left-right direction in the gaming machine. It is preferable that the player does not pay attention to the branch port of the branch passage 820 provided in the relevant portion, which makes it easier for the player to avoid paying attention to the branch port to the branch passage 820.

(33) In the third embodiment, the ball passage 861 in which the upper surface of the lower grand prize device 433 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the lower left, and guides the game ball to the lower right start winning device 832. The ball passage 862 for guiding the game ball to the general winning device 439B is provided on the left side of the lower prize winning device 433, but the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433 is an inclined surface facing downward to the right, and the ball passage 861 , 862, etc. may be arranged on the right side of the lower prize winning device 433.

(34) In the third embodiment, two ball passages 861 and 862 are provided as ball passages through which the game balls discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433 can enter. If it is a ball passage, it may be configured to provide three or more ball passages. Further, in FIG. 22, the ball passages 861 and 862 are provided adjacent to each other, but the ball passage 861 and the ball passage 862 may be separated from each other. In such a case, it is preferable that the game ball cannot pass between the ball passage 861 and the ball passage 862, and the entrances 861A and 861B between the ball passage 861 and the ball passage 862 are the game balls between the entrance portions. It is preferable that the passages are provided so close to each other that the entrances of other passages through which the passage is passed are not formed.

(35) In the third embodiment, the game ball that has entered the ball passage 861 on the side closer to the lower prize winning device 433 is guided by the lower right starting winning device 832, and the ball passage on the side away from the lower prize winning device 433. The game ball that entered the 862 was guided by the general winning device 439B, but the game ball that entered the ball passage 861 was guided by the general winning device 439B, and the game ball that entered the ball passage 862 was the lower right start winning prize. It may be configured to be guided by the device 832. That is, the game ball discharged through the upper surface of the lower prize winning device 433 has a lower value (for example, a privilege (for example) than the winning device capable of giving a higher value privilege (for example, a privilege including a winning / losing lottery)). , A privilege that does not include a winning or losing lottery) may be reached with a high probability.

(36) In the third embodiment, the game balls that have entered the ball passages 861 and 862 are all guided by a winning device capable of giving a predetermined privilege, but one of the ball passages 861 and 862 is configured. It may be configured to guide the game ball to a mere outlet such as an out outlet.

(37) In the third embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the branch port 864 is configured to enter the discharge port 401A, but the game ball that has passed through the branch port 864 enters a winning device that can give a privilege. Or, it may be configured so that it can enter. The winning device that allows the game ball that has passed through the branch port 864 to enter is a winning device that is given a privilege of lower value than the winning device that allows the game ball that has entered the ball passages 861 and 862 to enter. Is preferable.

(38) In the third embodiment, the game ball passing through the right ball passage 810 can enter the upper prize winning device 434 or the general winning device 439C, for example, as shown in FIG. , The game ball passing through the right ball passage 810 may be configured to enter an outlet such as an out port, or a winning device or an outlet through which the game ball passing through the right ball passage 810 can enter is provided. It may not be configured.

(39) In the fourth embodiment, the rear flow-down region 808 has a flow path portion having the same shape as the front flow-down region 809, and the flow path portion is in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine with respect to the front flow-down region 809. Although the configuration is provided so as to overlap each other, the rear flow region 808 and the front flow region 809 may have a flow path portion having an independent shape when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Further, the flow path portion of the rear flow-down region 808 does not have to completely overlap the flow path portion of the front flow-down region 809 in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine, and only a part of the flow path portion may overlap. Further, the flow path portion of the rear flow-down region 808 may not overlap the flow path portion of the front flow-down region 809 in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine.

Here, it is preferable that the rear flow area 808 has a flow path portion that does not overlap with the front flow area 809 in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine. A portion where the game ball passing through the flow-down area 808 is not hidden can be provided, and the game ball flowing down the backward flow-down area 808 can be easily visually recognized.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, on the downstream side of the rear flow area 808, a game ball launched after the game ball flowing down the rear flow area 808 is a game ball that flows down the front flow area 809. Although the contacting configuration has been described, the configuration may include a means for making it easier for the player to recognize the gaming ball passing through the preceding backward flow-down region 808. For example, a switch for detecting the entry of the game ball and a light emitting means such as an LED for emitting light of the rear flow area 808 are provided at the entrance portion of the rear flow area 808, and when the game ball enters the rear flow area 808, the rear flow area 808 is provided. The 808 may be irradiated with light to make it easier to visually recognize the approach of the game ball. As a result, the player can easily see the game ball passing through the passage located on the back side, and the player can easily switch the firing operation.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the rear flow area 808 is configured such that the game ball flows down at a speed different from that of the front flow area 809, but the game ball to the flow area located on the back side of the player. From the viewpoint of making it easier to visually recognize the approach, it is preferable that the flow-down region located on the back side has a configuration in which the flow-down of the game ball is slower than the flow-down region located on the front side. For example, the flow-down region located on the back side has a configuration having a large number of flow path portions meandering in the front-rear direction or the left-right direction as compared with the flow-down region located on the front side, or instead of or instead of this. In addition, it is preferable to have a configuration having a large number of delay portions or stop portions having a gentle slope so that the flow of the game ball can be delayed or stopped. As a result, it is possible to temporarily make the situation in which the game ball flowing down the rear flow area 808 is obstructed by the game ball flowing down the front flow area 809 and difficult to see, and the game ball flows down the rear flow area 808. The game ball can be easily visually recognized.

(40) In the fourth embodiment, one flow area (front flow area 809 and rear flow area 808) is provided on the front side and the back side of the game board 400, respectively, but the back side of the game board 400 is provided. There may be two or more flow-down regions provided in the.

(41) In the fourth embodiment, the game ball that flows down due to its own weight, such as the game ball that collides with the recoil prevention member 805 and is bounced off, is in the front flow area 809, the nail 711F, the through hole 871, and the rear flow area. It was configured to pass through 808. On the other hand, the game ball that is launched from the launching device 300 and flies by the launching force may pass through the front flow area 809, the nail 711F, the through hole 871, and the rear flow area 808.

(42) The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit is made, the pachinko machine may be implemented so that the expected big hit value can be increased until the big hit state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times or three times) including the big hit. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be put into a special gaming state on the condition that the ball wins a prize in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as an arrange ball type pachinko machine and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, and may be applied to slot machines, or may be applied to gaming machines such as parrots in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
<Feature 10>
A launching means for launching a game medium with variable strength, a variable winning opening that allows entry of the game medium based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and prohibits entry based on the entry of a predetermined number of game media, and the above. A first flow-down region in which the gaming medium launched from the launching means in a predetermined first intensity range flows down, and a predetermined second flow region that is stronger than the intensity in the first intensity range from the launching means and includes the maximum intensity. A gaming machine including a second flow-down region in which a game medium launched in the strength range can flow down to the variable winning opening.
A game medium launched from the launching means in an intensity range between the first intensity range and the second intensity range can flow down to the variable winning opening by a route different from that of the second flow-down region. Including 3 flow areas
In the entry allowed state of the variable winning opening, the intensity of the gaming medium launched from the launching means is switched so that at least one gaming medium flows down through the second flow-down region and at least one game through the third flow-down region. A gaming machine comprising a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege regarding the entry of a gaming medium into the variable winning opening by flowing down the medium.

In conventional gaming machines, there are known gaming machines equipped with a variable winning device that enters an entry-allowed state when a predetermined condition is satisfied and returns to an entry-prohibited state when the entry of a predetermined number of gaming balls is detected. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-004177). In such a gaming machine, when the variable winning device is in the entry allowable state, if the launch handle is rotated to the maximum and the game ball is launched with the maximum strength, the variable winning device can be entered with a high probability. Is the mainstream.

In mainstream gaming machines, when the variable winning device is in an entry-allowed state, the gaming ball is launched with a predetermined constant strength (maximum strength), that is, with the launch handle rotated to the maximum. Since the game progresses in a fixed manner, the game progress tends to be monotonous, and there is room for improvement in the game performance when the game ball is inserted into the variable winning device.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving game performance when a gaming ball is inserted into a variable winning opening (entrance to a variable winning device). There is.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 10, in order to obtain the privilege regarding the entry of the game medium into the variable winning opening, the player plays a game in the middle of the period in which the variable winning opening is in the entry allowable state. The launch of the medium must be regulated. As a result, it is possible to improve the monotonousness of the game progress in the game when the game medium is entered into the variable winning opening, as compared with the case where the privilege is not given regardless of whether or not the firing of the game medium is adjusted. In addition, if the launch of the game medium is adjusted, the privilege may be given. Therefore, in the game when the game medium is entered into the variable winning opening, the expectation for the grant of the privilege can be increased. .. Therefore, the playability in the game when the game medium is entered into the variable winning opening is improved.

<Feature 11>
The privilege-giving means acts on the gaming medium flowing down the third flow-down region, and the flow-down time of the gaming medium entering the variable winning opening through the second flow-down region and the variable winning opening through the third flow-down region. By causing a predetermined time difference from the flow-down time of the game medium entering the machine, the game medium flowing down through the second flow-down region and the game medium flowing down through the third flow-down region are separated from each other by the launching means. The gaming machine according to feature 10, which promotes reaching the variable winning opening at intervals shorter than the shortest firing interval of.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 11, by switching the intensity of the gaming medium launched from the launching means, all through the shortest firing interval of the gaming medium, that is, only one of the second flow region and the third flow region. There is a higher possibility that the variable winning opening will be reached at a shorter interval than the interval between the gaming media entering the variable winning opening when the gaming medium is flowed down. As a result, just before the entry of the game balls into the variable winning opening is prohibited, more game balls than a predetermined number can easily enter, and more game media can be paid out than planned.

<Feature 12>
The privilege-giving means suppresses the flow of the gaming medium, and the subsequent gaming medium that has flowed down following the preceding gaming medium in which the flow is suppressed approaches a predetermined range with respect to the preceding gaming medium. In this case, the gaming machine according to feature 10, wherein the suppression of the flow of the preceding gaming medium is released, and the preceding gaming medium and the succeeding gaming medium are allowed to flow in close proximity to each other within the predetermined range.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 12, by switching the intensity of the gaming medium launched from the launching means, the distance between the preceding gaming medium and the succeeding gaming medium is shortened in the flow process toward the variable winning opening. , Those game media are easy to reach the variable winning opening in close proximity. As a result, just before the entry of the game balls into the variable winning opening is prohibited, more game balls than a predetermined number can easily enter, and more game media can be paid out than planned.

Even when the preceding game medium and the succeeding game medium flow down through the third flow-down area, one of the preceding game medium and the succeeding game medium flows down through the second flow-down area, and the other flows down through the second flow-down area. 3 It may be the case of flowing down through the flow down region.

<Feature 13>
The gaming machine according to features 10 to 12, which includes a notification means for notifying information regarding switching of strength of a gaming medium for enjoying the privilege in the special gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 13, it is possible to surely provide all the players with an opportunity for which the privilege may be given, and to ensure the fairness among the players.

<Feature 20>
An operation unit (launch handle 252) provided at a position where the player can operate and capable of performing a predetermined pseudo reset operation, and
Display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) and
When a predetermined pseudo reset operation is performed on the operation unit in a predetermined gaming state (special gaming state, advantageous fluctuation state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, the display content of the display unit changes to the predetermined reset operation mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a state transition means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for transition.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting port provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is set. It is known that a large number of game balls (game media) can enter the winning opening. In addition, the pachinko machine is equipped with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery, and the lottery result is displayed as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

In recent years, when a jackpot is won in a normal gaming state, the game shifts to a so-called "probability changing state" after the end of the jackpot game (special gaming state), and in the probabilistic gaming state, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed is determined in advance. If a predetermined condition (for example, winning a big hit) is satisfied during the specified number of times (for example, 150 rotations), the probabilistic gaming state is continued, but if the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period, the normal game is played. A gaming machine that shifts to a state is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-147203).

However, like the above-mentioned gaming machine, after the end of the special gaming state, the gaming state shifts to an advantageous gaming state as compared with the normal gaming state, such as the probabilistic gaming state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in the probabilistic gaming state. There is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a configuration in which a probabilistic gaming state (that is, a gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal gaming state) can be continued by establishing it. For example, if a player continues to be unable to meet a given condition during a given period even though he has won a big hit many times, the player may find the game boring and diminish his motivation to play. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 20, an operation unit capable of performing a predetermined pseudo reset operation is provided at a position where the player can operate, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. When a predetermined pseudo reset operation is performed on the operation unit in a predetermined gaming state, the display content of the display unit shifts to a predetermined reset operation mode by the state transition means. As a result, the player who has performed the pseudo-reset operation resets his / her mood by seeing a display of a predetermined reset operation mode that is different from the display content that should be originally displayed on the display unit during the game. Can be switched).

Therefore, the flow of the game in the predetermined gaming state, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, is not preferable, for example, the player cannot satisfy the predetermined condition during the predetermined period after the transition to the probabilistic gaming state. In a situation, by performing a predetermined pseudo-reset operation on the operation unit, it is possible to renew and face the game by resetting one's own mood, so that the decline in the motivation to play can be suppressed. it can.

The "predetermined reset operation mode" described in feature 20 is not limited to being realized by displaying an image (moving image or still image), and instead of or in addition to displaying an image, a sound (predetermined reset) is used. The configuration may be realized by producing an operation sound), may be a "predetermined mode", or may be a "mode for outputting at least one of a predetermined display or a predetermined sound".

<Feature 21>
The gaming machine according to feature 20.
A launching means (launching device 330) capable of launching a game medium (game ball) with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating unit, and
An entrance where the game medium can enter, which is formed at a position where the game medium launched from the launching means can enter when the amount of operation of the operation unit is a predetermined amount (the winning opening of the upper right start winning device 731). )When,
A detection unit (upper right start winning switch 741) capable of detecting the game medium that has entered the entrance, and
With
The state transition means is a gaming machine characterized in that, when the gaming medium is detected by the detection unit, the display content of the display unit shifts to the predetermined reset operation mode.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 21, when the gaming medium launched from the launching means enters the entrance and is detected by the detection unit, the display content of the display unit is reset by the state transition means. Move to. The entrance is formed at a position where the game medium launched from the launching means can enter when the operating amount of the operating unit is a predetermined amount.

Therefore, since the operation unit for launching the game medium from the launching means can be diverted as the operation unit for performing the pseudo reset operation, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated operation unit, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed, and the launching means can be used. It is not necessary to operate the dedicated operation unit during the game in which the game medium is fired, and it is possible to avoid the troublesomeness of having the player perform the pseudo reset operation. Further, when shifting the display content of the display unit to the reset operation mode, the player intentionally adjusts the operation amount of the operation unit in order to adjust the firing intensity by the firing means so that the game medium enters the entrance. Since it is necessary, the monotony of the game in which the game medium is launched from the launching means by the operation of the operation unit is reduced.

<Feature 22>
The gaming machine according to feature 21.
A first entrance (1st entrance) in which the game medium launched by the launching means flows down and the game medium can enter when the operation unit is operated with a first operation amount which is a part of the predetermined amount. It has an inlet 708A), and is operated by a first flow-down region (right flow-down region 708) through which the game medium entering from the first inlet flows down, and a second operation amount in which the operation unit is a part of the predetermined amount. In this case, the game medium is an entrance through which the game medium can enter, and has a second entrance (entrance 709A) provided at a position different from the first entrance, and the game medium entered from the second entrance is the first. A flow area including at least a second flow area (middle flow area 709) that flows down by a route different from that of the game medium that flows down the flow area is provided.
When the game medium flowing down the first flow-down region can come into contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down region on the upstream side of the entrance and does not come into contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down region. Is a gaming machine characterized in that when it flows down on a route that cannot enter the entrance, and when it comes into contact with a game medium that flows down the second flow-down region, it can enter the entrance by changing the route due to the contact. ..

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 22, by operating the operation unit with the first operating amount which is a part of the predetermined amount, the gaming medium launched from the launching means can enter the first entrance. , The gaming medium that has entered the first entrance flows down the first flow-down area. On the other hand, by operating the operation unit with the second operation amount which is a part of the predetermined amount, the game medium launched from the launching means can be made to enter the second entrance, and the game medium which has entered the second entrance. Flows down the second flow down area. Therefore, the player can make the game medium flow down in the flow-down region corresponding to the operation amount by adjusting the operation amount with respect to the operation unit.

Here, the game medium flowing down the first flow-down region can come into contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down region on the upstream side of the entrance. Here, when the game medium flowing down the first flow-down region does not come into contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down region, the game medium flowing down the first flow-down region flows down by a route that cannot enter the entrance. On the other hand, when the game medium flowing down the first flow-down region comes into contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down region, the game medium flowing down the first flow-down region is due to contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down region. By changing the route, you can enter the entrance.

Therefore, in order to shift the display content of the display unit to the reset operation mode, the player causes the operation unit to come into contact with the game medium flowing down the first flow-down area and the game medium flowing down the second flow-down area. It is necessary to intentionally adjust the amount of operation. Thereby, the monotonousness of the game in which the game medium is launched from the launching means by the operation of the operation unit can be suitably reduced.

<Feature 30>
Display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) and
The first entrance (the winning opening of the right-starting winning device 432) where the game medium (game ball) can enter,
The first detection unit (right start winning switch 442) that satisfies the start condition when the game medium that has entered the first entrance is detected, and
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and
A holding means (main control board 920) for holding the lottery result by the lottery means, and
Based on the lottery result held by the holding means, a display control means (sub-control board 940) that sequentially displays a predetermined variation display and a stop display indicating the lottery result after the variation display on the display unit.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, the game control means (main control) that generates a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state after the stop display indicating the lottery result is displayed by the display control means. Board 920) and
An operation unit (launch handle 252) provided at a position where the player can operate, and
A launching means (launching device 330) that launches a game medium when the operating unit is operated, and
A second entrance (upper right start winning device 731) into which the game medium can enter, which is formed at a position where the game medium launched from the launching means can enter when the operation amount of the operation unit is a predetermined amount. Winning opening) and
A second detection unit (upper right start winning switch 741) capable of detecting the game medium that has entered the second entrance, and
When the gaming medium is detected by the second detection unit while at least one lottery result is held in the holding means, the lottery result held in the holding means is the same as the lottery result. A delay means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for delaying the display timing of the stop display by the display control means or the occurrence timing of the special game state by the game control means based on the lottery result is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting port provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is set. It is known that a large number of game balls (game media) can enter the winning opening. In addition, the pachinko machine is equipped with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of the symbol based on the lottery, and the lottery result is displayed as the final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting port while the display device is displaying the variation of the symbol, the winning information used for the big hit lottery is predetermined. Some are configured to be held and stored up to a number (for example, 4). At this time, the hit information stored on hold is used for a lottery as to whether or not it is a big hit after the variable display of the symbol is completed, and the next variable display of the symbol is started accordingly.

In recent years, when a jackpot is won in a normal gaming state, the game shifts to a so-called "probability changing state" after the end of the jackpot game (special gaming state), and in the probabilistic gaming state, the number of times the symbol variation is displayed is determined in advance. If a predetermined condition (for example, winning a big hit) is satisfied during the specified number of times (for example, 150 rotations), the probabilistic gaming state is continued, but if the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period, the normal game is played. A gaming machine that shifts to a state is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-147203).

However, like the above-mentioned gaming machine, by satisfying a predetermined condition during a predetermined period after the end of the special gaming state, a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, such as a probabilistic gaming state, is continued. There was still room for improvement in the gaming machines with a configuration that could be used.

For example, as the above-mentioned "predetermined condition", the player has a specific device that operates according to the result of a lottery corresponding to the variation display of each symbol during a predetermined period after the end of the special gaming state. When the result generated based on the launched game ball (for example, so-called "V winning") is included, the player leaves the game machine when the game shifts to the special game state with the hit information held and stored. If the game ball cannot be fired, the chance of receiving the privilege in the probabilistic gaming state (that is, the continuation of the probabilistic gaming state) is wasted.

In particular, when the "predetermined period", which is the deadline for satisfying the predetermined condition after the end of the special gaming state, is the number of fluctuations displayed less than the upper limit value in which the hit information can be held and stored, the player can use the gaming machine Leaving is equivalent to completely abandoning the benefits in the probabilistic gaming state. Therefore, unless the player abandons the privilege in the probabilistic gaming state by himself / herself, the player may leave the gaming machine in which he / she is playing until the probabilistic gaming state ends without continuing (that is, until the transition to the normal gaming state). I can't do it, and I can't take a break.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 30, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the lottery result is obtained by the holding means. It is put on hold. Based on the lottery result held by the holding means, a predetermined variation display and a stop display showing the lottery result after the variation display are sequentially displayed on the display unit by the display control means, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result. In this case, the game control means displays a stop display indicating the lottery result by the display control means, and then a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated.

When at least one lottery result is held in the holding means and the game medium launched from the launching means enters the second entrance and is detected by the second detection unit, it is held in the holding means. Of the lottery results, the display timing of the stop display by the display control means for at least one lottery result, or the occurrence timing of the special game state by the game control means based on the lottery result is delayed by the delay means.

Therefore, the player enters the game medium aiming at the second entrance in a state where at least one lottery result is held in the holding means, so that the player can enter the game medium at least once for the lottery result held in the holding means. For the variable display, the period until the stop display or the period until the special gaming state occurs after the variable display is delayed from each timing when the game medium is not entered into the second entrance under the same circumstances. Can be done.

As a result, the player causes the second detection unit to detect the game ball in a state where at least one lottery result is held by the holding means, until all the lottery results held by the holding means are processed. It is possible to move away from the gaming machine by using the delay by the delay means within the period of. Therefore, for example, in a gaming machine having a configuration in which a predetermined privilege can be granted by satisfying a predetermined condition during a predetermined period after the end of the special gaming state, the player needs to do so without abandoning the privilege. You can move away from the gaming machine depending on the situation.

Here, since the second entrance is formed at a position where the game medium launched from the launching means can enter when the operating amount of the operation unit is a predetermined amount, when delaying by the delay means, the game is played. Since it is necessary for the person to intentionally adjust the operation amount of the operation unit in order to adjust the firing intensity by the launching means so that the game medium enters the second entrance, the game medium is operated from the launching means by the operation of the operation unit. The monotony of the game that fires is reduced.

The "second detection unit" in the gaming machine according to the feature 30 may be a detection unit that satisfies the starting condition when the gaming medium is detected, or the starting condition is satisfied when the gaming medium is detected. It may be a detection unit that does not. That is, the "second entrance" in the gaming machine according to feature 30 may be an entrance where the start condition is satisfied when the game medium enters, or the start condition is satisfied even when the game medium enters. It may be an entrance that does not.

Further, in the delay means in the gaming machine according to the feature 30, "at least one lottery result among the lottery results held in the holding means" is started when the second detection unit detects the gaming medium. If the detection unit does not satisfy the conditions, it means "at least one lottery result out of at least one lottery result held in the holding means before the game medium is detected by the second detection unit". There may be. Alternatively, if the second detection unit is a detection unit for which the start condition is satisfied when the game medium is detected, "at least one that was held by the holding means before the game medium was detected by the second detection unit". Of the lottery results consisting of the lottery result and the lottery result drawn by the lottery means based on the establishment of the starting condition due to the detection of the game medium by the second detection unit, at least one lottery result ". You may.

<Feature 31>
The gaming machine according to feature 30.
A first entrance (1st entrance) in which the game medium launched by the launching means flows down and the game medium can enter when the operation unit is operated with a first operation amount which is a part of the predetermined amount. It has an inlet 708A), and is operated by a first flow-down region (right flow-down region 708) through which the game medium entering from the first inlet flows down, and a second operation amount in which the operation unit is a part of the predetermined amount. In this case, the game medium is an entrance through which the game medium can enter, and has a second entrance (entrance 709A) provided at a position different from the first entrance, and the game medium entered from the second entrance is the first. A flow area including at least a second flow area (middle flow area 709) that flows down by a route different from that of the game medium that flows down the flow area is provided.
When the game medium flowing down the first flow-down region can come into contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down region on the upstream side of the entrance and does not come into contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down region. Is a gaming machine characterized in that when it flows down on a route that cannot enter the entrance, and when it comes into contact with a game medium that flows down the second flow-down region, it can enter the entrance by changing the route due to the contact. ..

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 31, by operating the operation unit with the first operating amount which is a part of the predetermined amount, the gaming medium launched from the launching means can enter the first entrance. , The gaming medium that has entered the first entrance flows down the first flow-down area. On the other hand, by operating the operation unit with the second operation amount which is a part of the predetermined amount, the game medium launched from the launching means can be made to enter the second entrance, and the game medium which has entered the second entrance. Flows down the second flow down area. Therefore, the player can make the game medium flow down in the flow-down region corresponding to the operation amount by adjusting the operation amount with respect to the operation unit.

Here, the game medium flowing down the first flow-down region can come into contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down region on the upstream side of the entrance. Here, when the game medium flowing down the first flow-down region does not come into contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down region, the game medium flowing down the first flow-down region flows down by a route that cannot enter the entrance. On the other hand, when the game medium flowing down the first flow-down region comes into contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down region, the game medium flowing down the first flow-down region is due to contact with the game medium flowing down the second flow-down region. By changing the route, you can enter the entrance.

Therefore, when delaying by the delay means, the player intentionally adjusts the amount of operation on the operation unit so that the game medium flowing down the first flow-down region and the game medium flowing down the second flow-down region come into contact with each other. Need to adjust. Thereby, the monotonousness of the game in which the game medium is launched from the launching means by the operation of the operation unit can be suitably reduced.

The "second manipulated variable" described in feature 31 may be an amount completely different from the "first manipulated variable", and a part range of the "second manipulated variable" is the "first manipulated variable". The amount may overlap with a part of the range of.

<Feature 32>
The gaming machine according to feature 30 or 31.
The third entrance (the winning opening of the upper right starting winning device 731) where the game medium can enter, and
A third detection unit (upper right start winning switch 741) capable of detecting the game medium that has entered the third entrance is provided.
A preset detection unit of the third detection unit or the second detection unit is configured as a detection unit in which a start condition is satisfied when the game medium passes through.
The holding means includes the first lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol lottery) performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the starting condition due to the detection of the game medium by the first detection unit, and the first. The second lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol lottery) performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the start condition due to the detection of the game medium by the detection unit or the third detection unit is independent of each other. Hold and hold
The delay means is held by the holding means when the second lottery result is held by the holding means while a predetermined number of the first lottery results are held by the holding means. Of the lottery results, the display timing of the stop display by the display control means for at least one of the lottery results, or the occurrence timing of the special game state by the game control means based on the lottery result is delayed.
The gaming machine
A gaming machine comprising a notification means for executing a predetermined notification when the predetermined number of the first lottery results are held by the holding means.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 32, when a predetermined number of first lottery results are held in the holding means and the second lottery result is held in the holding means, the delay due to the delay means Is executed. However, if the condition for delaying by the delay means is satisfied even though the delay by the delay means is unnecessary, the player wastes time by the delay due to the delay means. On the other hand, when a predetermined number of first lottery results are held in the holding means, the notification means executes the predetermined notification, so that the player may satisfy the condition of delaying by the delay means. It is possible to wait for the first lottery result held in the holding means to be processed so that the condition is not satisfied. This makes it possible to preferably prevent the player from wasting time due to the delay caused by the delay means.

<Feature 40>
Display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) and
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the display control means (sub-control board 940) displays the variable display of the identification information and the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means on the display unit. , With
When the predetermined long variation occurrence condition is satisfied, the display control means waits until the stop display is displayed after the variation display of the identification information is started as compared with the case where the long variation occurrence condition is not satisfied. A specific fluctuation display (variation display for a specific period) having a long fluctuation time is displayed on the display unit, and information that allows the player to leave the seat (information J that allows the player to leave the seat). Is displayed on the display unit.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball (game medium) launched by a player enters the start port and a start condition is satisfied, a lottery is performed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the lottery is performed. The symbol (identification information) corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as a stop display following the variable display. At this time, if the stop display is a symbol corresponding to the lottery result indicating a big hit, the player after the stop display. It is known that a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs and a large number of prize balls (game value) can be paid out (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-004177).

However, in such a conventional pachinko machine, it is difficult for a player to leave the seat during the game because the game being played may be carried out by another customer who is a third party due to leaving the seat. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 40, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, it corresponds to a variable display of identification information and a lottery result by a lottery means performed based on the establishment of the starting condition. The stop display of the identified information is displayed on the display unit by the display control means. Here, when a predetermined long variation occurrence condition is satisfied, the display control means starts the variation display of the identification information and then displays the stop display as compared with the case where the long variation occurrence condition is not satisfied. A specific fluctuation display having a long fluctuation time is displayed on the display unit, and information on the ability to leave the seat corresponding to the state in which the player can leave the seat is displayed on the display unit.

No one can advance the game while the variation display is displayed, that is, until the stop display is displayed after the variation display. Therefore, when a specific fluctuation display having a longer fluctuation time than when the long fluctuation generation condition is satisfied is displayed on the display unit, the period of the specific fluctuation display is displayed. Even if the player leaves the seat, it is possible to prevent another customer from proceeding with the game without permission while the player is away from the seat.

Therefore, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the player can leave the seat with peace of mind without worrying about the arbitrary progress of the game by other customers. Further, when the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied, the display control means displays the information on the display unit corresponding to the state in which the player can leave the seat, so that the player can leave the seat. You can know when you can safely leave your seat based on the possible information.

In the gaming machine described in the feature 40, the display unit that displays a specific variable display and the display unit that displays the information on the ability to leave the seat may be the same display unit or different display units. .. That is, the information on the ability to leave the seat may be displayed on the display unit displaying the specific variation display, or the information on the possibility of leaving the seat may be displayed on the display unit different from the display unit displaying the specific variation display. May be configured.

<Feature 41>
The gaming machine according to feature 40.
It is equipped with an operation unit (launch handle 252) provided at a position where the player can operate it.
A gaming machine characterized in that the long variation generation condition is satisfied based on the fact that a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit during the game.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 41, the long variation occurrence condition is satisfied based on the fact that the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit provided at the position where the player can operate during the game. Therefore, the player can operate the operation unit as necessary to satisfy the condition for generating long fluctuations and create a situation in which he / she can safely leave his / her seat.

<Feature 42>
The gaming machine according to feature 40.
A payout means (payout device 540) for paying out a predetermined game value based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of a situation in which a predetermined number or more of game values can be paid out by the payout means within a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 42, the long fluctuation occurrence condition is satisfied based on the situation where a predetermined number or more of game values can be paid out by the payout means within a predetermined period. By giving the player the opportunity to temporarily leave the gambling spirit that the player may have due to the situation where a large number of gaming values can be paid out within the period, the player who has become enthusiastic about the gambling spirit It is possible to keep calm.

<Feature 43>
The gaming machine according to feature 42.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, a special game in which the game value that can be paid out by the payout means is larger than that in the normal game state after the stop display indicating the lottery result is displayed by the display control means. A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a state is provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the long variation generation condition is satisfied based on the fact that a plurality of predetermined special gaming states are continuously generated within the predetermined period by the gaming control means.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 43, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, after the stop display indicating the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, the special gaming state is changed by the game control means. It occurs, and as a result, more game value can be paid out than in the normal game state. Since the long fluctuation generation condition is satisfied based on the fact that a plurality of special gaming states of a predetermined number of times have continuously occurred within a predetermined period, the special gaming states have continuously occurred within the predetermined period. By giving the player a chance to temporarily leave his / her seat for the gambling spirit that he / she can have, it is possible to calm the player who has become enthusiastic about the gambling spirit.

<Feature 44>
The gaming machine according to feature 42.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, a special game in which the game value that can be paid out by the payout means is larger than that in the normal game state after the stop display indicating the lottery result is displayed by the display control means. A game control means (main control board 920) for generating a state is provided.
The long variation occurrence condition is that after the special gaming state in which a predetermined number or more of game values can be paid out by the payout means is generated by the game control means, the predetermined result is obtained by the lottery means within the predetermined period. A gaming machine characterized by being established based on being selected.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 44, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, after the stop display indicating the lottery result is displayed on the display unit, the special gaming state is changed by the game control means. It occurs, and as a result, more game value can be paid out than in the normal game state. After a special game state in which a predetermined number or more of game values can be paid out occurs, a long fluctuation occurrence condition is established based on the fact that a predetermined result for generating the special game state is selected by a lottery means within a predetermined period. Therefore, by giving an opportunity to temporarily leave the player's gambling spirit that can be held in such a situation, it is possible to calm the player who has become enthusiastic about the gambling spirit.

<Feature 50>
It has a variable entry unit that can switch between an entry allowance state in which the game ball is allowed to enter and an entry restriction state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the entry allowance state, and is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition. In a gaming machine that, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained by a predetermined lottery, the variable ball entry portion is switched to the entry allowable state to generate a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state.
A value-adding ball-adding section (upper large winning device 434, general winning device 439C) that includes at least the variable ball-filling section and is given a predetermined game value when a game ball enters.
It is a ball passage including a plurality of flow paths arranged on the upstream side of the variable entry portion and arranged in the left-right direction, and when the variable entry portion is in the entry allowable state, the ball passage is entered. The first ball passage (lower right passage part 810C) capable of guiding all of the game balls to the value-adding entry part, and
A guide passage (branch passage 820) that guides the game ball to an area that cannot enter the first ball passage, and
A ball passage that is connected to the upstream side of the first ball passage and has a branch port (between the nail 411A and the nail 411B) to the guide passage, and a game ball that has entered the ball passage. The first ball passage or the second ball passage (right middle passage portion 810B) that guides to the guide passage, and
A third ball passage that is connected to the upstream side of the second ball passage and includes a plurality of flow paths arranged in the left-right direction, and guides a game ball that has entered the ball passage to the second ball passage. (Upper right passage 810B)
A gaming machine characterized in that the first ball passage and the third ball passage are configured to have at least a section in which a passage portion thicker than the second ball passage is continuous in the vertical direction.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. A typical conventional pachinko machine is equipped with a variable winning device that can switch between an entry-allowed state that allows the entry of game balls and an entry-prohibited state that prohibits the entry of game balls, and the starting conditions have been met. It is known that when a big hit is won in a lottery conducted based on the above, a special gaming state is generated by switching the variable ball entry portion to an entry allowable state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-004177). Therefore, a player playing a game with such a pachinko machine launches a game ball aiming at a variable winning device that has been switched to an entry allowable state in a special gaming state, and thereby enters the game ball (game medium) into the variable winning device. It is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls (game value).

However, there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine such as the above-mentioned gaming machine, which can obtain a large number of prize balls by firing a gaming ball aiming at a variable winning device that has been switched to an entry-allowed state in a special gaming state. was there. For example, for a player, it is preferable that all the game balls launched by the player in the special gaming state enter the variable winning device, so the player launches the variable winning device that has been switched to the entry allowable state in the special gaming state. It is conceivable to configure all the played game balls to enter the variable winning device. However, such a configuration may cause an excessive number of balls to be thrown, which may be a management burden on the amusement park (hall) side.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 50, a variable ball entry unit capable of switching between an approach-allowed state in which the game ball is allowed to enter and an entry-restricted state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the entry-allowed state. A first ball passage is provided on the upstream side. A second ball passage is continuously provided on the upstream side of the first ball passage, and a third ball passage is continuously provided on the upstream side of the second ball passage. The second ball passage is provided with a branch port to the guide passage. The guide passage is a ball passage that guides the game ball to an area where the first ball passage cannot be entered. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the third ball passage enters the second ball passage through the third ball passage, and enters the first ball passage or the guide passage.

The first ball passage is configured so that all the game balls that have entered the first ball passage can be guided to the value-adding entry portion when the variable entry portion is in the entry allowable state. All of the game balls that have entered the first ball passage from the second ball passage can enter the variable ball entry section or other value-adding entry section. The value-adding ball entry section is a ball entry section to which a predetermined game value is given when a game ball enters, and includes a variable ball entry section.

On the other hand, since the second ball passage is provided with a branch port to the guide passage, not all the game balls that have entered the third ball passage enter the first ball passage, and some of them do not enter the first ball passage. You will be guided to an area where you cannot enter the first ball passage through the guide passage.

Here, the first ball passage and the third ball passage are configured to have at least a section in which a passage portion thicker than the second ball passage is continuous in the vertical direction. That is, the second ball passage has a passage portion narrower than the third ball passage and the first ball passage, so that the third ball passage, the second ball passage, and the first ball passage are arranged in this order from the upstream side. It functions as a ball passage including a constricted part in the ball passage.

The game ball that has entered the third ball passage is configured as a ball passage including a plurality of flow paths in which the third ball passage is lined up in the left-right direction. When passing through the second ball passage including the constricted portion, the game balls scattered in the left-right direction flow down so as to be collected in the left-right direction. Therefore, since the flow of the game ball changes in the second ball passage, it is difficult for the player to recognize that even if the player enters the guide passage from the branch port in the second ball passage.

Since the first ball passage is also configured as a ball passage including a plurality of flow paths arranged in the left-right direction, the game ball that has entered the first ball passage through the second ball passage flows down again while being scattered in the left-right direction. To do. Therefore, the flow of the game ball changes again by entering the first ball passage from the second ball passage, and at this point as well, the game ball that has entered the third ball passage enters the guide passage in the second ball passage. Even if it does, it can be difficult for the player to recognize the change.

In addition, during the special game state, the player may place a characteristic location in the special game state (for example, a variable ball entry section on the downstream side of the first ball passage, a display section for displaying an effect in the special game state, etc.). Since there is a tendency to pay attention to this point as well, even if a game ball that has flowed down the third ball passage enters the guide passage without entering the first ball passage in the second ball passage, it is given to the player. Hard to recognize.

Therefore, although some of the game balls that have entered the third ball passage are guided to the area where they cannot enter the first ball passage through the guide passage, all of the game balls that have entered the third ball passage. Can give the player the illusion of being guided to a value-adding entry section such as a variable entry section via the first ball passage, thereby sensuously increasing the number of gaming balls in a special gaming state. It is possible to give the player the impression that is entering the variable ball entry section. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the variable ball entry portion in the special game state.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 50, the interest of the game of launching the gaming ball aiming at the variable ball entry portion in the special gaming state is improved, and the gaming value acquired by the player becomes excessive and the gaming field becomes excessive. It is possible to suppress the disadvantages that the (hall) side receives at the same time.

It is preferable that the variable ball entry portion arranged on the downstream side of the first ball passage has an entrance that opens to a predetermined width that is at least twice the diameter dimension of the game ball in the admissible state. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first ball passage can enter the variable ball entry section from various positions in the width direction in the wide variable ball entry section while being scattered to the left and right, so that many game balls can be sensuously entered. Can give the player the impression that is entering the variable ball entry section.

Further, the variable ball entry portion may have an entrance (winning opening) of the game ball configured to have a predetermined width that is at least twice the diameter dimension of the game ball, and the entry is allowed by a movable member that opens and closes the entrance portion. The state and the entry restricted state may be switched, and the passage portion of the game ball configured to have a predetermined width equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball provided on the downstream side of the entrance portion can be opened and closed. The entry allowable state and the entry restricted state may be switched depending on the member. Further, the variable entry portion may be configured such that the entrance is opened so that the game ball can enter in the entry allowed state, and the entrance is closed so that the game ball does not enter in the approach restricted state, or the entry allowed state. The game ball may be guided to the entrance at the entrance, and the game ball may not be guided to the entrance in the entry restricted state.

<Feature 51>
The gaming machine according to feature 50.
The value-adding ball-entry unit includes the variable ball-entry unit and a non-variable ball-entry unit (general winning device 439C) into which a game ball can enter even in a game state other than the special game state.
The non-variable ball entry unit is a gaming machine characterized in that the non-variable ball entry unit is arranged at a position on the upstream side of the variable ball entry unit so that a game ball that has entered the first ball passage can enter.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 51, the non-variable ball entry section capable of entering the game ball even in a game state other than the special gaming state is one of the value-adding entry sections on the upstream side of the variable entry section. However, since the game ball that has entered the first ball passage is arranged at a position where it can enter, when the player launches the game ball aiming at the variable ball entry section, the game ball is the variable ball entry section. Alternatively, it is easy to pay attention to the variable ball entry section and the non-variable ball entry section by paying attention to which of the non-variable ball entry sections is entered. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the game ball has entered the guide passage in the second ball passage.

<Feature 52>
The gaming machine according to feature 51.
The non-variable ball-entry unit is configured as a ball-entry unit to which a lower game value is given when the game ball enters the variable ball-entry unit than when the game ball enters the variable ball-entry unit. ..

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 52, the non-variable ball entry section is configured as a ball entry section in which a lower game value is given when the game ball enters the variable entry section than when the game ball enters the variable entry section. Therefore, when the player launches the game ball aiming at the variable ball entry section, the player expects the game ball to enter the variable ball entry section, and the variable ball entry section and the non-variable ball entry section. Easy to pay attention to. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide passage in the second ball passage.

<Feature 53>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 51 to 52.
A gaming machine characterized in that the non-variable ball-entry portion is arranged closer to the variable ball-entry portion than a position at half the height of the first ball passage.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 53, since the non-variable ball entry portion is arranged closer to the variable entry portion than the position of half the height of the first ball passage, the player can change the ball entry portion. It is easy to pay attention to the lower half side in the first ball passage where the ball portion and the non-variable ball entry portion are located. Therefore, since the possibility that the line of sight is deviated from the branch port to the guide passage formed in the second ball passage is preferably increased, it is preferable to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide passage in the second ball passage. It can be difficult to make people.

<Feature 54>
The gaming machine according to feature 51 or 53.
The branch port to the guide passage is formed on one side in the left-right direction of the second ball passage.
A gaming machine characterized in that the non-variable ball entry portion is arranged on the other side of the first ball passage in the left-right direction with respect to the one side.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 54, the branch port to the guide passage is formed on one side in the left-right direction in the second ball passage, while the non-variable ball entry portion is formed in the left-right direction in the first ball passage. Since it is arranged on the other side with respect to the one side, it becomes difficult for the player to monitor the branch port to the guide passage by paying attention to the non-variable ball entry portion, so that the game ball is the second ball. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to preferably recognize whether or not the player has entered the guide passage in the passage.

<Feature 55>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 50 to 54.
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) having a screen capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the branch port to the guide passage is formed on the side of the second ball passage in the left-right direction away from the screen of the display unit.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 55, the branch port to the guide passage is formed on the side of the second ball passage in the left-right direction away from the screen of the display unit capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. In the special gaming state, when the player pays attention to the effect displayed on the display unit, it becomes difficult for the player to monitor the branch port to the guide passage. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to preferably recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide passage in the second ball passage.

<Feature 56>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 50 to 55.
A ball guide portion (a row of nails including nails 411B, 411C, 411D, a passage wall 811) arranged to guide a game ball in a direction of descending and inclining toward a branch port to the guide passage.
In the disposition section of the ball guide portion, a flow passage portion (between the nail 411B and the nail 411C, and the nail 411C and the nail 411D) formed so that the game ball can flow down in a direction intersecting the downward inclination direction. Between) and
A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball that has passed through the flow-down passage portion enters the first ball passage without entering the guide passage.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 56, since the ball guiding portion is arranged so as to guide the gaming ball in the direction of descending and inclining toward the branch port to the guide passage, the flowing gaming ball is relatively fast. It is possible to guide the user to the branch port in a natural flow and enter the guide passage from the branch port. On the other hand, in the arrangement section of the ball guiding portion, a flow-down passage portion capable of flowing down the game ball in a direction intersecting the downwardly inclined direction is formed, and the game ball passes through the flow-down passage portion. You can enter the first ball passage without entering the guide passage.

The flow of the game ball through the flow passage to enter the first ball passage is unnatural and slower than when it flows naturally along the ball guide, and therefore the player is required to do so. The flow is more memorable. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide passage from the branch port.

<Feature 57>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 50 to 56.
A visible portion (front plate 222, rear plate) composed of a light transmitting member that makes at least a part of the game area visible from the front side by arranging the game ball on the front side of the game area where the game ball can flow down. A front side member (front block) including a 223) and an invisible portion (front decorative body 210) formed around the visible portion so that the front side to the back surface side cannot be seen or is difficult to see. 102) and
The first ball passage, the second ball passage, and the third ball passage are provided at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction with respect to the visible portion of the front side member.
The guide passage is characterized in that, when the game ball completely enters the guide passage, at least a part of the game ball is provided at a position where the front side member overlaps the invisible portion in the front-rear direction. A game machine to be.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 57, the first ball passage, the second ball passage, and the third ball passage overlap in the front-rear direction with respect to the visible portion of the front side member composed of the light transmitting member. Since they are provided at the positions, these ball passages can be visually recognized from the front side via the visible portion. On the other hand, in the guide passage, when the game ball completely enters the guide passage, at least a part of the game ball is invisible or difficult to see from the front side to the back side. Since it is provided at a position where it overlaps the part in the front-rear direction, the game ball that has entered the guide passage from the second ball passage is on the rear side of the invisible part at the same time as entering the guide passage or immediately after entering the guide passage. Enter and thereby get out of the player's view. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide passage in the second ball passage.

In the gaming machine described in feature 57, "when the gaming ball completely enters the guide passage" is defined as, for example, a surface on which the gaming ball constitutes a branch port (entrance of the guiding passage) to the guiding passage. The time when the game ball completely enters the guide passage (that is, the time when the game ball that has entered the guide passage touches the surface, and the time when the game ball enters the guide passage to a position where it cannot return to the second ball passage). It may be.

<Feature 60>
A visible portion (front plate 222, rear plate) composed of a light transmitting member that makes at least a part of the game area visible from the front side by arranging the game ball on the front side of the game area where the game ball can flow down. A front side member (front block) including a 223) and an invisible portion (front decorative body 210) formed around the visible portion so that the front side to the back surface side cannot be seen or is difficult to see. 102) and
A main ball passage (right ball passage 810) formed in the right or left area of the game area and allowing the entered game ball to flow down to the downstream side.
A small amount of the game balls that have branched from the main ball passage and flowed down the upstream part of the main ball passage that is continuous to the upstream side from the branch portion are placed on the right side or the right side of the outer edge side of the game area. A branch passage (branch passage 820) that branches to the left and flows down,
With
The main ball passage is provided at a position overlapping the visible portion of the front surface side member in the front-rear direction.
The branch passage is characterized in that at least a part of the game ball is provided at a position where the front side member overlaps the invisible portion in the front-rear direction when the game ball completely enters the branch passage. A game machine to be.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. A typical conventional pachinko machine is equipped with a variable winning device that can switch between an entry-allowed state that allows the entry of game balls and an entry-prohibited state that prohibits the entry of game balls, and the starting conditions have been met. It is known that when a big hit is won in a lottery conducted based on the above, a special gaming state is generated by switching the variable ball entry portion to an entry allowable state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-004177). Therefore, a player playing a game with such a pachinko machine launches a game ball aiming at a variable winning device that has been switched to an entry allowable state in a special gaming state, and thereby enters the game ball (game medium) into the variable winning device. It is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls (game value).

However, there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines including the above gaming machines. For example, for a player, it is preferable that all the game balls launched by the player in the special gaming state enter the variable winning device, so the player launches the variable winning device that has been switched to the entry allowable state in the special gaming state. It is conceivable to configure all the played game balls to enter the variable winning device. However, such a configuration may cause an excessive number of balls to be thrown, which may be a management burden on the amusement park (hall) side.

Therefore, even if the game ball is launched aiming at the variable winning device, the flow path of the game ball is designed so that a part of the game ball deviates from the variable winning device. However, the player may be dissatisfied when he / she has the impression that many of the launched game balls are flowing out of the variable winning device even though he / she has aimed at the variable winning device. .. Similarly, when a branch passage for guiding a game ball is provided outside the game area for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game, the player is dissatisfied when he / she receives the impression that many game balls enter the branch passage. There is a risk of embracing.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine according to the feature 60, a main ball passage is formed in the right or left region in the gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down to allow the entering gaming ball to flow down to the downstream side. At the same time, a branch passage branching from the main ball passage is formed. A small amount of game balls that have flowed down the upstream part of the main ball passage that is continuous to the upstream side from the branch part from the main ball passage have entered the branch passage, and have branched and entered from the branch part. The game ball is allowed to flow down to the right side or the left side on the outer edge side of the game area. That is, among the game balls that have entered the main ball passage, a small amount of game balls do not flow down the main ball passage as they are, but flow down from the branch passage to the outer edge side of the game area.

Here, since the main ball passage is provided at a position overlapping the visible portion of the front side member composed of the light transmitting member in the front-rear direction, the main ball passage is provided from the front side via the visible portion. It is possible to see it. On the other hand, in the branch passage, when the game ball completely enters the branch passage, at least a part of the game ball is invisible or difficult to see from the front side to the back side. Since it is provided at a position where it overlaps the portion in the front-rear direction, the game ball that has entered the branch passage from the main ball passage is placed on the rear side of the invisible portion at the same time as the entry into the branch passage or immediately after entering the branch passage. Enter, thereby leaving the player's view.

As a result, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the game ball flowing down the main ball passage has entered the branch passage. Therefore, a small amount of the game balls that have entered the main ball passage pass through the branch passage and enter the game area. It is difficult to know that it was sent to the outer edge side. Therefore, when the player launches the ball aiming at passing through the main ball passage, even if all the launched game balls do not pass through the main ball passage, the player is unlikely to be dissatisfied with the game.

The "small amount" in the feature 60 is, for example, preferably less than 50%, preferably less than 30%, and less than 10% of the game balls that have flowed down the upstream portion of the main ball passage. Is preferable.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature 60, "when the gaming ball completely enters the branch passage" is defined as, for example, a surface on which the gaming ball constitutes a branch entrance (entrance of the branch passage) to the branch passage. (That is, when the game ball that has entered the branch passage touches the surface, and when the game ball enters the branch passage to a position where it cannot return to the main ball passage. There may be.

<Feature 61>
The gaming machine according to feature 60.
The branch port (between the nail 411A and the nail 411B) from the main ball passage to the branch passage is within a region having a predetermined width in the vertical direction about a line segment having the maximum length in the left-right direction in the game area. The gaming machine, which is formed on the end side of the gaming area on the side where the main ball passage is formed.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 61, the branch port from the main ball passage to the branch passage is within a region having a predetermined width in the vertical direction about a line segment having the maximum length in the left-right direction in the game region. Therefore, it is formed on the end side of the game area on the side where the main ball passage is formed. That is, since the branch port to the branch passage is arranged at the end side of the widest range in the left-right direction in the game area or a range equivalent to this, it is difficult for the player's line of sight to reach the branch port to the branch passage. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the branch passage from the branch port.

In the gaming machine described in feature 61, the "region having a predetermined width in the vertical direction about the line segment having the maximum length in the horizontal direction in the gaming region" is, for example, crossing the center of the gaming region in the horizontal direction. The area is often centered on a line segment and has a width of about 25% of the height of the game area in the vertical direction. The game area is centered on a line segment that crosses the center of the game area in the left-right direction. It is preferable that the width is about 15% of the height of the game area in the vertical direction, and about 5% of the height of the game area is centered on a line segment that crosses the center of the game area in the left-right direction. It is preferable that the length is a region having a width in the vertical direction.

<Feature 62>
The gaming machine according to feature 60 or 61.
A variable ball entry unit that can switch between an entry-allowed state in which the game ball is allowed to enter and an entry-restricted state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the entry-allowed state, and can be opened to a predetermined width in the entry-allowed state Top prize winning device 434) and
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained by a predetermined lottery performed based on the establishment of the starting condition, the variable entry portion is switched to the entry allowable state to generate a special gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. Game control means (main control board 920) and
The main ball passage is arranged on the upstream side of the variable entry portion, and when the variable entry portion is in the entry allowable state, the main ball passage is on the downstream side without entering the branch passage. All of the gaming balls that flow down to the ball, including at least the variable entry section, are value-added entry sections (upper large winning device 434, general winning device 439C) to which a predetermined game value is given when the game ball enters. ) Is a game machine characterized by being configured as a ball passage that can be entered.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 62, in the main ball passage, when the variable entry portion is in the admissible state in the special game state, all the game balls that have entered the main ball passage become the variable entry portion. Since it is configured to be guideable, all of the gaming balls that have entered the main ball passage without entering the branch passage can enter the variable entry section or other value-adding entry section. The value-adding ball entry section is a ball entry section to which a predetermined game value is given when a game ball enters, and includes a variable ball entry section.

Therefore, although a part of the game ball that has entered the main ball passage is sent to the outer edge side of the game area via the branch passage, it is difficult for the player to grasp that fact and the player enters the main ball passage. It is possible to give the player the illusion that all of the game balls that have been played are guided to the value-adding entry section such as the variable entry section, and thereby many game balls are sensuously changed to the variable entry section. It is possible to give the player the impression that he / she is entering the aisle. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the variable ball entry portion in the special game state.

<Feature 70>
It has a variable entry unit that can switch between an entry allowance state in which the game ball is allowed to enter and an entry restriction state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the entry allowance state, and is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition. In a gaming machine that, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained by a predetermined lottery, the variable ball entry portion is switched to the entry allowable state to generate a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state.
A value-adding ball-adding section (upper large winning device 434, general winning device 439C) that includes at least the variable ball-filling section and is given a predetermined game value when a game ball enters.
A ball passage that is arranged on the upstream side of the variable entry portion and includes three or more flow paths arranged in the left-right direction, and enters the ball passage when the variable entry portion is in the entry allowable state. The first ball passage (lower right passage part 810C) capable of guiding all of the game balls to the value-added entry part, and
A guide passage (branch passage 820) that guides the game ball to an area that cannot enter the first ball passage, and
A ball passage that is connected to the upstream side of the first ball passage and has a branch port (between the nail 411A and the nail 411B) to the guide passage, and a game ball that has entered the ball passage. The first ball passage or the second ball passage (right middle passage portion 810B) that guides to the guide passage, and
A third ball that is connected to the upstream side of the second ball passage and includes three or more flow paths arranged in the left-right direction, and guides a game ball that has entered the ball passage to the second ball passage. A gaming machine characterized by having a passage (upper right passage portion 810B).

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. A typical conventional pachinko machine is equipped with a variable winning device that can switch between an entry-allowed state that allows the entry of game balls and an entry-prohibited state that prohibits the entry of game balls, and the starting conditions have been met. It is known that when a big hit is won in a lottery conducted based on the above, a special gaming state is generated by switching the variable ball entry portion to an entry allowable state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-004177). Therefore, a player playing a game with such a pachinko machine launches a game ball aiming at a variable winning device that has been switched to an entry allowable state in a special gaming state, and thereby enters the game ball (game medium) into the variable winning device. It is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls (game value).

However, there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine such as the above-mentioned gaming machine, which can obtain a large number of prize balls by firing a gaming ball aiming at a variable winning device that has been switched to an entry-allowed state in a special gaming state. was there. For example, for a player, it is preferable that all the game balls launched by the player in the special gaming state enter the variable winning device, so the player launches the variable winning device that has been switched to the entry allowable state in the special gaming state. It is conceivable to configure all the played game balls to enter the variable winning device. However, such a configuration may cause an excessive number of balls to be thrown, which may be a management burden on the amusement park (hall) side.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 70, a variable ball entry unit capable of switching between an approach-allowed state in which the game ball is allowed to enter and an entry-restricted state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the entry-allowed state. A first ball passage is provided on the upstream side. A second ball passage is continuously provided on the upstream side of the first ball passage, and a third ball passage is continuously provided on the upstream side of the second ball passage. The second ball passage is provided with a branch port to the guide passage. The guide passage is a ball passage that guides the game ball to an area where the first ball passage cannot be entered. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the third ball passage enters the second ball passage through the third ball passage, and enters the first ball passage or the guide passage.

The first ball passage is configured so that all the game balls that have entered the first ball passage can be guided to the value-adding entry portion when the variable entry portion is in the entry allowable state. All of the game balls that have entered the first ball passage from the second ball passage can enter the variable ball entry section or other value-adding entry section. The value-adding ball entry section is a ball entry section to which a predetermined game value is given when a game ball enters, and includes a variable ball entry section.

On the other hand, since the second ball passage is provided with a branch port to the guide passage, not all the game balls that have entered the third ball passage enter the first ball passage, and some of them do not enter the first ball passage. You will be guided to an area where you cannot enter the first ball passage through the guide passage.

Here, since the first ball passage and the third ball passage that sandwich the second ball passage are both configured as ball passages including three or more flow paths arranged in the left-right direction, the player can use these ball passages. It is difficult to identify the flow path of the game ball in the above, and the line of sight of the player is dispersed. In addition, during the special game state, the player can use a characteristic place in the special game state (for example, a variable ball entry section located downstream from the first ball passage, a display section for displaying an effect in the special game state, etc.). Therefore, even if a game ball that has flowed down the third ball passage enters the guide passage without entering the first ball passage in the second ball passage, it is difficult for the player to recognize it.

Therefore, although some of the game balls that have entered the third ball passage are guided to the area where they cannot enter the first ball passage through the guide passage, all of the game balls that have entered the third ball passage. Can give the player the illusion of being guided to a value-adding entry section such as a variable entry section via the first ball passage, thereby sensuously increasing the number of gaming balls in a special gaming state. It is possible to give the player the impression that is entering the variable ball entry section. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the variable ball entry portion in the special game state.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 70, the interest of the game of launching the gaming ball aiming at the variable ball entry portion in the special gaming state is improved, and the gaming value acquired by the player becomes excessive and the gaming field becomes excessive. It is possible to suppress the disadvantages that the (hall) side receives at the same time.

It is preferable that the variable ball entry portion arranged on the downstream side of the first ball passage has an entrance that opens to a predetermined width that is at least twice the diameter dimension of the game ball in the admissible state. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first ball passage can enter the variable ball entry section from various positions in the width direction in the wide variable ball entry section while being scattered to the left and right, so that many game balls can be sensuously entered. Can give the player the impression that is entering the variable ball entry section.

Further, the variable ball entry portion may have an entrance (winning opening) of the game ball configured to have a predetermined width that is at least twice the diameter dimension of the game ball, and the entry is allowed by a movable member that opens and closes the entrance portion. The state and the entry restricted state may be switched, and the passage portion of the game ball configured to have a predetermined width equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball provided on the downstream side of the entrance portion can be opened and closed. The entry allowable state and the entry restricted state may be switched depending on the member. Further, the variable entry portion may be configured such that the entrance is opened so that the game ball can enter in the entry allowed state, and the entrance is closed so that the game ball does not enter in the approach restricted state, or the entry allowed state. The game ball may be guided to the entrance at the entrance, and the game ball may not be guided to the entrance in the entry restricted state.

<Feature 71>
The gaming machine according to feature 70.
A visible portion (front plate 222, rear plate) composed of a light transmitting member that makes at least a part of the game area visible from the front side by arranging the game ball on the front side of the game area where the game ball can flow down. A front side member (front block) including a 223) and an invisible portion (front decorative body 210) formed around the visible portion so that the front side to the back surface side cannot be seen or is difficult to see. 102) and
The first ball passage, the second ball passage, and the third ball passage are provided at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction with respect to the visible portion of the front side member.
The guide passage is characterized in that, when the game ball completely enters the guide passage, at least a part of the game ball is provided at a position where the front side member overlaps the invisible portion in the front-rear direction. A game machine to be.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 71, the first ball passage, the second ball passage, and the third ball passage overlap in the front-rear direction with respect to the visible portion of the front side member composed of the light transmitting member. Since they are provided at the positions, these ball passages can be visually recognized from the front side via the visible portion. On the other hand, in the guide passage, when the game ball completely enters the guide passage, at least a part of the game ball is invisible or difficult to see from the front side to the back side. Since it is provided at a position where it overlaps the part in the front-rear direction, the game ball that has entered the guide passage from the second ball passage is on the rear side of the invisible part at the same time as entering the guide passage or immediately after entering the guide passage. Enter and thereby get out of the player's view. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide passage in the second ball passage.

In the gaming machine described in feature 71, "when the gaming ball completely enters the guide passage" is defined as, for example, a surface on which the gaming ball constitutes a branch port (entrance of the guiding passage) to the guiding passage. The time when the game ball completely enters the guide passage (that is, the time when the game ball that has entered the guide passage touches the surface, and the time when the game ball enters the guide passage to a position where it cannot return to the second ball passage). It may be.

<Feature 72>
The gaming machine according to feature 70 or 71.
The first ball passage, the second ball passage, and the third ball passage are formed in the right or left area in the game area where the game ball can flow down.
The branch port (between the nail 411A and the nail 411B) to the guide passage is within a region having a predetermined width in the vertical direction about a line segment having the maximum length in the horizontal direction in the game region. A gaming machine characterized in that it is formed on the end side of the gaming area on the side on which the second ball passage is formed.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 72, the branch port to the guide passage is within a region having a predetermined width in the vertical direction about a line segment having the maximum length in the horizontal direction in the gaming region, and the gaming It is formed on the end side of the side where the second ball passage is formed in the region. That is, since the branch port to the guide passage is arranged at the end side of the widest range in the left-right direction in the game area or a range equivalent to this, it is difficult for the player's line of sight to reach the branch port to the guide passage. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide passage from the branch port.

In the gaming machine described in feature 71, the "region having a predetermined width in the vertical direction about the line segment having the maximum length in the horizontal direction in the gaming region" is, for example, crossing the center of the gaming region in the horizontal direction. The area is often centered on a line segment and has a width of about 25% of the height of the game area in the vertical direction. The game area is centered on a line segment that crosses the center of the game area in the left-right direction. It is preferable that the width is about 15% of the height of the game area in the vertical direction, and about 5% of the height of the game area is centered on a line segment that crosses the center of the game area in the left-right direction. It is preferable that the length is a region having a width in the vertical direction.

<Feature 73>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 70 to 72.
A ball guide portion (a row of nails including nails 411B, 411C, 411D, a passage wall 811) arranged to guide a game ball in a direction of descending and inclining toward a branch port to the guide passage.
In the disposition section of the ball guide portion, a flow passage portion (between the nail 411B and the nail 411C, and the nail 411C and the nail 411D) formed so that the game ball can flow down in a direction intersecting the downward inclination direction. Between) and
A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball that has passed through the flow-down passage portion enters the first ball passage without entering the guide passage.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 73, since the ball guiding portion is arranged so as to guide the gaming ball in the direction of descending and inclining toward the branch port to the guide passage, the flowing gaming ball is relatively fast. It is possible to guide the user to the branch port in a natural flow and enter the guide passage from the branch port. On the other hand, in the arrangement section of the ball guiding portion, a flow-down passage portion capable of flowing down the game ball in a direction intersecting the downwardly inclined direction is formed, and the game ball passes through the flow-down passage portion. You can enter the first ball passage without entering the guide passage.

The flow of the game ball through the flow passage to enter the first ball passage is unnatural and slower than when it flows naturally along the ball guide, and therefore the player is required to do so. The flow is more memorable. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game ball has entered the guide passage from the branch port.

<Feature 80>
A launching means (launching device 330) for launching a game ball, and
A first ball passage (forward flow area 809) provided in a game area through which a game ball launched by the launching means can pass, and
A branch portion formed with an opening so as to penetrate the game member (game board 400) constituting the game area on the upstream side of the first ball passage in the front-rear direction, and the game ball that has not entered is the first ball. A branch portion (through hole 871) that guides the entered game ball to a different side of the game member in the front-rear direction from the first ball passage while passing through the passage.
A game ball that has entered the branch portion is located on the front side or the rear side of the game area where the first ball passage is provided and at a position that overlaps at least a part of the first ball passage in the front-rear direction. A second ball passage (rear flow area 808) provided so that it can pass through,
It is provided with an approach probability changing means (nail 411F, recoil prevention member 805) arranged so that the approach probability of the game ball to the branch portion can be changed by the launch operation of the game ball. A featured gaming machine.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting port provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is set. It is known that a large number of game balls (game media) can enter the winning opening (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-004177).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in preferably utilizing the limited region of the gaming member constituting the gaming region. For example, in a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a plurality of ball passages for causing a game ball to flow down in a predetermined flow path are provided, the plurality of ball passages are used as a game member (for example, a game board) constituting a game area. Since the game members are formed independently in the left-right direction on the front side of the ball, the area occupied by the game members on the front side increases as the number of ball passages increases, considering that the size of the game members is limited. Therefore, the area for arranging the display unit, the movable member for the effect, and the like is limited.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 80, the gaming member constituting the gaming area is formed with an opening of a branch portion penetrating the gaming member in the front-rear direction on the upstream side of the first ball passage. .. The game ball that did not enter the branch portion passes through the first ball passage, while the game ball that has entered the branch portion is guided to a different side of the game member in the front-rear direction from the first ball passage. Then enter the second ball passage.

Since the approach probability of the game ball to the branch portion can be changed by the launch operation of the game ball by the approach probability changing means, the player can change the first ball passage or the second ball passage by his / her own launch operation. Among them, many game balls can enter the targeted ball passage.

Since the second ball passage is formed in the game area on the front side or the rear side with respect to the position where the first ball passage is provided and at a position overlapping with at least a part of the first ball passage in the front-rear direction, the second ball passage is formed. Compared to the case where the 1-ball passage and the 2nd ball passage are provided on the same side of the game member, the occupied area of the game member can be suppressed, thereby securing an area for arranging the display unit, the movable member for the effect, and the like. It becomes possible to do. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 80, the limited region of the gaming member constituting the gaming region can be suitably utilized.

In the feature 80, the "entry probability changing means" may be a member that changes the approach probability of the game ball to the branch portion according to the contact state with the game ball, or the firing intensity according to the firing operation. It may be a launching device capable of changing the trajectory of the game ball by firing the game ball and changing the probability of the game ball entering the branch portion.

Further, the "first ball passage", "branch portion", "second ball passage", and "entry probability changing means" in the feature 80 may be provided in the game area through which the game ball can pass, and the game may be played. Of the area, the game ball may be provided in the area through which the game ball passes by flowing down due to its own weight, or the area through which the game ball flies due to the influence of the firing force fired by the launching means (for example, the game). It may be provided in the area on the upstream side near the entrance portion of the area). Further, the "approach probability changing means" is a position where the game ball that has traveled downward can first come into contact with the rail member (outer rail 402) that limits the traveling direction of the game ball that is directed upward by the firing force. By providing it at such a position, the probability of entering the branch portion can be efficiently changed according to the launching operation of the game ball by the player.

Further, the "entry probability changing means" in the feature 80 may be configured so as to be arranged so that the approach probability of the game ball to the branch portion can be changed at least by the firing operation of the game ball, and instead of this configuration. Therefore, the probability of the game ball entering the branch may be changed at least according to the launch operation of the game ball, or the launch intensity or rate of fire of the game ball differs by a certain amount or more with respect to the predetermined launch operation. The probability of the game ball entering the branch may be changed when another firing operation is performed.

Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration of "changing the probability of the game ball entering the branch portion by at least the launch operation of the game ball" in the feature 80, the first ball passage and the second ball passage The ratio or ratio of the game balls passing through the and may be changed, or the game ball that has reached the position where the branch portion is provided (or the position where at least a part overlaps the branch portion in the front-rear direction) moves to the branch portion. The probability of entering may be changed at least by the firing operation of the game ball.

Further, the gaming machine according to the feature 80 includes an operation unit provided at a position where the player can perform a firing operation, and the approach probability changing means is a branching unit by at least a firing operation of the game ball with respect to the operation unit. It may be arranged so that the probability of entry of the game ball into the game can be changed.

<Feature 81>
The gaming machine according to feature 80.
Equipped with an operation unit (launch handle 252) provided at a position where the player can launch and operate
The launching means launches a game ball with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating unit when a firing operation is performed on the operating unit.
The approach probability changing means is arranged when a game ball launched from the launching means with a strength within a predetermined range is in contact with the game ball launched with an intensity of the first range of the predetermined range. A gaming machine comprising a member that improves the probability of entering a branch portion as compared with the case where a gaming ball launched with a strength not included in the first range of the predetermined range comes into contact with the gaming ball.

According to the game machine according to the feature 81, when the player performs a firing operation on the operation unit, the game ball is launched from the launching means with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the operation unit. The approach probability changing means is such that when a game ball launched from the launching means with an intensity of a predetermined range is arranged so as to be in contact with the game ball launched with an intensity of the first range of the predetermined range, the game ball is contacted. It includes a member that improves the probability of entering the branch portion as compared with the case where a game ball launched with a strength not included in the first range of the predetermined range comes into contact with the ball. Therefore, the player can enter the game ball into the target ball passage of the first ball passage or the second ball passage by changing the amount of operation with respect to the operation unit.

<Feature 82>
The gaming machine according to feature 80 or 81.
An entrance where a game ball can enter (upper right start winning device 731) and
A game in which an opening is formed so as to penetrate the game member in the front-rear direction at a position upstream of the entrance and downstream of the second ball passage, and the game passes through the second ball passage. It is provided with a discharge portion (through hole 872) for discharging the ball to the same side of the game member in the front-rear direction as well as the first ball passage.
The game ball passing through the first ball passage can come into contact with the game ball discharged from the discharge portion on the upstream side of the entrance.
The game ball discharged from the discharge unit travels on a route that cannot enter the entrance when the game ball passing through the first ball passage does not come into contact with the game ball, and the game ball passing through the first ball passage. A gaming machine characterized in that when a player comes into contact with a machine, the player can enter the entrance by changing the route due to the contact.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 82, the gaming ball passing through the second ball passage is discharged to the same side of the gaming member in the front-rear direction as the first ball passage via the discharging portion. The game ball passing through the first ball passage can come into contact with the game ball discharged from the discharge portion on the upstream side of the entrance where the game ball can enter. Here, when the game ball passing through the first ball passage does not come into contact with the game ball discharged from the discharge unit, the game ball discharged from the discharge unit travels on a route that cannot enter the entrance. On the other hand, when the game ball passing through the first ball passage comes into contact with the game ball discharged from the discharge unit, the game ball discharged from the discharge unit changes its route due to contact with the game ball passing through the first ball passage. Allows you to enter the entrance.

Therefore, in order to allow the game ball to enter the entrance, the game ball passing through the first ball passage comes into contact with the game ball at the timing when the game ball passing through the second ball passage is discharged from the discharge portion. Since it is necessary for the player to intentionally adjust the launch operation of the game ball, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game in which the game ball is launched by the launch operation of the player. In addition, in order to allow the game ball to enter the entrance, the skill of the player is also required to some extent, and in that respect as well, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game in which the game ball is launched by the player's launch operation. it can.

<Feature 83>
The gaming machine according to feature 82.
A guide portion (protruding member 873) for guiding the game ball discharged from the discharge port to a path that cannot enter the entrance is provided.
The guiding portion is a gaming machine characterized in that the guiding portion is configured to be temporarily supported at a position where a gaming ball passing through the first ball passage can be contacted.

According to the gaming machine according to the feature 82, the gaming ball ejected from the ejection port is guided by the guiding portion to a route that cannot enter the entrance, so that the gaming ball passing through the first ball passage is ejected. It is possible to prevent the game ball discharged from the discharge unit from entering the entrance even though it does not come into contact with the game ball discharged from the. On the other hand, since the guide unit is configured to be temporarily supportable at a position where the game ball passing through the first ball passage can be contacted, the first ball is discharged from the discharge unit. It is possible to make it easier for the game balls passing through the ball passage to come into contact with each other, and it is possible to prevent the game balls from entering the entrance from becoming too difficult.

<Feature 90>
An operation unit (launch handle 252) provided at a position where the player can launch and operate,
A launching means (launching device 330) that launches a game ball with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating unit when a firing operation is performed on the operating unit.
An upstream ball passage (right ball passage 810) through which a game ball launched from the launching means with a strength within a predetermined range flows down, and
Aligned flow bottoms (lower prize) that are provided on the downstream side of the upstream ball passage and allow game balls that have passed through the upstream ball passage to flow down to the downstream side in a row on the lower right side or the lower left side. (Upper surface of device 433) and
A first passage entrance (entrance 861A) which is a ball passage provided on the downstream side of the aligned flow lower part and is opened upward so that a game ball flowing down from the aligned flow lower part to the lower right side or the lower left side can enter. ) On the downstream side first ball passage (ball passage 861) and
A first privilege granting unit (lower right start winning device 832) provided in the downstream first ball passage and granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters,
A spherical passage having a second passage inlet (inlet 862A) that opens upward on the side away from the lower right of the aligned flow, on the right or left side of the first entrance of the passage, from the lower right of the aligned flow. A second ball passage (ball passage 862) on the downstream side, in which a game ball flowing down to the side or the lower left side enters with a lower probability than the entrance of the first passage.
With the second privilege granting unit (general prize device 439B) provided in the second ball passage on the downstream side and granting a predetermined privilege different from the privilege granted by the first privilege granting unit when the game ball enters. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a winning opening where a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters, or a starting opening where a predetermined lottery such as a big hit lottery is performed when a game ball enters. For example, a ball entry portion is provided in the game area to which a predetermined privilege is given when the game ball enters (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-004177).

However, there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine such as the above-mentioned gaming machine, which is provided with a ball entry portion to which a predetermined privilege is given when the gaming ball enters. For example, even though a player fires at a game ball while expecting to enter a ball entry section where a predetermined privilege is given when the game ball enters, such as a winning opening, many of them are fired. If the player has the impression that the ball is flowing off the ball entry portion, the player may feel dissatisfied with the game being performed and the interest of the game may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 90, the gaming ball launched from the launching means at a strength within a predetermined range flows down the upstream ball passage and then moves to the lower right side or the lower left side in the lower part of the aligned flow. They form a line one by one and flow down to the downstream side. On the downstream side from the lower part of the aligned flow, there is provided a first ball passage on the downstream side having a first passage entrance that opens upward so that a game ball that has flowed down from the lower part of the aligned flow to the lower right side or the lower left side can enter. On the right or left side of the downstream first ball passage, which is far from the lower part of the aligned flow, a second passage is opened upward so that the game ball flowing down from the lower part of the aligned flow to the lower right side or the lower left side can enter. A second ball passage on the downstream side having an entrance is provided.

At this time, since the second passage entrance is provided so that the game ball flowing down from the lower part of the aligned flow enters with a lower probability than the entrance of the first passage, the game ball flowing down from the lower part of the aligned flow is downstream. It is easier to enter the downstream first ball passage where the passage entrance (first passage entrance) is located closer to the lower part of the aligned flow than the passage entrance (second passage entrance) of the side second ball passage. .. According to such a configuration, whether the game ball flowing down from the lower part of the aligned flow mainly enters the first ball passage on the downstream side from the first passage entrance where the passage entrance is relatively close to the lower part of the aligned flow. While giving such an impression to the player, even if the game ball cannot enter the first passage entrance, the player gives the impression as if he / she enters the second ball passage on the downstream side from the second passage entrance. Can be given to.

As a result, when a game ball is launched aiming at the upstream ball passage, most of the game balls that reach the lower part of the aligned flow through the upstream ball passage are the downstream first ball passage or the downstream second ball. It is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is guided to the first privilege granting section or the second privilege granting section through the passage. Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 90, it is possible to improve the interest of the game of launching the gaming ball aiming at the upstream ball passage.

In particular, the game balls that have reached the lower part of the rectified flow flow down while being rectified one by one in a row at the lower part of the rectified flow, so that the player can sequentially discharge the game balls one by one from the lower part of the rectified flow. By looking at the balls, it is as if each of these game balls enters either the downstream first ball passage or the downstream second ball passage, that is, almost all of the game balls that have reached the lower part of the rectified flow. It is easy to give the illusion of entering the downstream first ball passage or the downstream second ball passage. As a result, it is possible to more preferably improve the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the upstream ball passage.

Further, since the privilege set in each of the privilege granting unit (that is, the first privilege granting unit and the second privilege granting unit) into which the game ball that has reached the rectified flow lower part can enter is different from each other, the rectified flow lower part It is possible to make the player interested in the behavior of the game ball flowing down. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game of launching the game ball aiming at the right ball passage 810.

<Feature 91>
An operation unit (launch handle 252) provided at a position where the player can launch and operate,
A launching means (launching device 330) that launches a game ball with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating unit when a firing operation is performed on the operating unit.
An upstream ball passage (right ball passage 810) through which a game ball launched from the launching means with a strength within a predetermined range flows down, and
A game ball flowing down the upstream ball passage is provided at a position where it can enter, and when the game ball enters, a predetermined privilege is given, or the game ball is discharged from the game area without giving the privilege. Upstream discharge unit (upper prize winning device 434, general winning device 439B) and
Aligned flow bottoms (lower prize) that are provided on the downstream side of the upstream ball passage and allow game balls that have passed through the upstream ball passage to flow down to the downstream side in a row on the lower right side or the lower left side. (Upper surface of device 433) and
A first passage entrance (entrance 861A) which is a ball passage provided on the downstream side of the aligned flow lower part and is opened upward so that a game ball flowing down from the aligned flow lower part to the lower right side or the lower left side can enter. ) On the downstream side first ball passage (ball passage 861) and
A first privilege granting unit (lower right start winning device 832) provided in the downstream first ball passage and granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters,
A spherical passage having a second passage inlet (inlet 862A) that opens upward on the side away from the lower right of the aligned flow, on the right or left side of the first entrance of the passage, from the lower right of the aligned flow. A second ball passage (ball passage 862) on the downstream side, in which a game ball flowing down to the side or the lower left side enters with a lower probability than the entrance of the first passage.
With the second privilege granting unit (general prize device 439B) provided in the second ball passage on the downstream side and granting a predetermined privilege different from the privilege granted by the first privilege granting unit when the game ball enters. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

A pachinko machine is a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a winning opening where a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters, or a starting opening where a predetermined lottery such as a big hit lottery is performed when a game ball enters. For example, a ball entry portion is provided in the game area to which a predetermined privilege is given when the game ball enters (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-004177).

However, there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine such as the above-mentioned gaming machine, which is provided with a ball entry portion to which a predetermined privilege is given when the gaming ball enters. For example, even though a player fires at a game ball while expecting to enter a ball entry section where a predetermined privilege is given when the game ball enters, such as a winning opening, many of them are fired. If the player has the impression that the ball is flowing off the ball entry portion, the player may feel dissatisfied with the game being performed and the interest of the game may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 91, the gaming balls launched from the launching means with a strength within a predetermined range flow down the upstream ball passage without entering the upstream discharge portion, and then flow down in a aligned manner. In the section, one row is formed on the lower right side or the lower left side, and the flow flows down to the downstream side. On the downstream side from the lower part of the aligned flow, there is provided a first ball passage on the downstream side having a first passage entrance that opens upward so that a game ball that has flowed down from the lower part of the aligned flow to the lower right side or the lower left side can enter. On the right or left side of the downstream first ball passage, which is far from the lower part of the aligned flow, a second passage is opened upward so that the game ball flowing down from the lower part of the aligned flow to the lower right side or the lower left side can enter. A second ball passage on the downstream side having an entrance is provided.

At this time, since the second passage entrance is provided so that the game ball flowing down from the lower part of the aligned flow enters with a lower probability than the entrance of the first passage, the game ball flowing down from the lower part of the aligned flow is downstream. It is easier to enter the downstream first ball passage where the passage entrance (first passage entrance) is located closer to the lower part of the aligned flow than the passage entrance (second passage entrance) of the side second ball passage. .. According to such a configuration, whether the game ball flowing down from the lower part of the aligned flow mainly enters the first ball passage on the downstream side from the first passage entrance where the passage entrance is relatively close to the lower part of the aligned flow. While giving such an impression to the player, even if the game ball cannot enter the first passage entrance, the player gives the impression as if he / she enters the second ball passage on the downstream side from the second passage entrance. Can be given to.

As a result, when a game ball is launched aiming at the upstream ball passage, most of the game balls that reach the lower part of the aligned flow are given the first privilege via the downstream first ball passage or the downstream second ball passage. It is possible to make the player feel as if he / she is guided by the department or the second privilege granting department. Furthermore, since the game ball that reaches the lower part of the aligned flow is a game ball that has flowed down the upstream side ball passage without entering the upstream side discharge portion, which upstream side is the game ball launched aiming at the upstream side ball passage. Even if the player does not enter the discharge unit, the player can be given a favorable impression as if he / she is finally guided to the first privilege granting unit or the second privilege granting unit. Therefore, according to the gaming machine described in the feature 91, it is possible to improve the interest of the game of launching the gaming ball aiming at the upstream ball passage.

In particular, the game balls that have reached the lower part of the rectified flow flow down while being rectified one by one in a row at the lower part of the rectified flow, so that the player can sequentially discharge the game balls one by one from the lower part of the rectified flow. By looking at the balls, it is as if each of these game balls enters either the downstream first ball passage or the downstream second ball passage, that is, almost all of the game balls that have reached the lower part of the rectified flow. It is easy to give the illusion of entering the downstream first ball passage or the downstream second ball passage. As a result, it is possible to more preferably improve the interest of the game in which the game ball is launched aiming at the upstream ball passage.

Further, since the privilege set in each of the privilege granting unit (that is, the first privilege granting unit and the second privilege granting unit) into which the game ball that has reached the rectified flow lower part can enter is different from each other, the rectified flow lower part It is possible to make the player interested in the behavior of the game ball flowing down. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game of launching the game ball aiming at the right ball passage 810.

<Feature 92>
The gaming machine according to feature 90 or 91.
When a game ball enters, the game ball is discharged from the game area without granting the privilege, or a privilege having a lower value than the privilege given by the first privilege granting unit or the second privilege granting unit is performed. Equipped with a ball entry section (exhaust port 401A)
A game ball that has flowed down from the lower right side or the lower left side of the aligned flow has a lower probability of entering the entry portion than the probability of entering the first passage entrance or the second passage entrance. A featured gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 92, when the gaming ball enters, the gaming ball is discharged from the gaming area without granting the privilege, or is granted by the first privilege granting unit or the second privilege granting unit. There is a ball entry section that gives benefits that are less valuable than the benefits that are given. A game ball that has flowed down from the lower right side or the lower left side of the aligned flow has a lower probability of entering the entry portion than the probability of entering the first passage entrance or the second passage entrance. It is possible to prevent all of the game balls that have flowed down to the lower right side or the lower left side from entering the first privilege granting portion or the second privilege granting portion via the first passage entrance or the second passage entrance. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive amount of benefits by the first privilege granting unit or the second privilege granting unit, so that the amusement park (hall) side suffers a disadvantage due to the excessive privilege granting. Can be suppressed.

<Feature 93>
The gaming machine according to any one of the features 90 to 92.
When a game ball enters, the game ball is discharged from the game area without granting the privilege, or the ball entry unit that grants a privilege having a lower value than the privilege given by the first privilege granting unit ( Discharge port 401A) and
A variable mechanism (entrance regulation mechanism) provided at the entrance portion of the first privilege granting portion, which can switch between an entry allowance state in which the game ball is allowed to enter and an entry restriction state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the entry allowance state. With 852)
When the gaming ball flowing down the first ball passage on the downstream side flows down to the downstream side from the first privilege granting portion without entering the first privilege granting portion because the variable mechanism is in the entry restricted state. , A gaming machine characterized by entering the ball entry portion.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature 93, the gaming ball flowing down the first ball passage on the downstream side is allowed to enter the first privilege granting portion when the variable mechanism is in the entry allowable state, while being variable. When the mechanism is in the entry restricted state, it flows down to the downstream side from the first privilege granting portion and enters the ball entry portion without entering the first privilege granting portion. When the game ball enters, the ball entry unit discharges the game ball from the game area without granting the privilege, or grants a privilege having a lower value than the privilege given by the first privilege granting unit. Therefore, not all the game balls that have entered the first ball passage on the downstream side from the first passage entrance are given the first privilege, so that the privilege is given excessively and the game hall side becomes It is possible to suppress suffering a disadvantage. Further, it is possible to preferably suppress the behavior of the game ball discharged from the lower part of the rectified flow from becoming monotonous.

In addition, at least one feature described in features 10 to 93 may be applied in combination with any other or a plurality of other features. The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A launch operation means operated by a player, a game ball launch means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launch operation means, and a passage portion for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area. , A gaming machine including each gaming component arranged in the gaming area, and giving a privilege to the player when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each of the gaming parts.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: The rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that gives special benefits to pachinko machines.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as ball gaming machines.

100 ... Pachinko machine, 250 ... Launch operation device, 252 ... Launch handle, 330 ... Launch device, 400 ... Game board, 402 ... Outer rail, 403 ... Inner rail, 404 ... Return ball prevention mechanism, 405 ... Counter-jump prevention member, 407 ... Left flow area, 408 ... Right flow area, 409 ... Middle flow area, 411F ... Nail, 420 ... Central structure, 421 ... Left wall part, 422 ... Right wall part, 423 ... Middle wall part, 424 ... Guide passage 424A ... entrance, 424B ... outlet, 425 ... route switching mechanism, 425A ... delay guide passage board, 433 ... lower prize winning device, 434 ... upper prize winning device, 439A to 439C ... general winning device, 443 ... lower Winning switch, 444 ... Upper large winning switch, 479 ... Decorative symbol display device, 432 ... Right starting winning device, 442 ... Right starting winning switch, 708 ... Right flow down area, 708A ... Right flow down area entrance, 709 ... Middle flow down area , 709A ... Entrance of midstream down region, 731 ... Upper right start winning device, 741 ... Upper right starting winning switch, 920 ... Main control board, 940 ... Sub control board, J ... Aisle available information, 810 ... Right ball passage, 810A ... upper right passage, 810B ... middle right passage, 810C ... lower right passage, 820 ... branch passage, 808 ... backward flow area, 809 ... forward flow area, 861 ... ball passage, 862 ... ball passage, 832 ... right Lower start winning device, 871 ... through hole, 872 ... through hole, 873 ... protruding member

Claims (2)

A launching means for launching a game ball,
A first ball passage provided in a game area through which a game ball launched by the launching means can pass, and
A branch portion formed with an opening so as to penetrate the game member constituting the game area on the upstream side of the first ball passage in the front-rear direction, and the game ball that has not entered passes through the first ball passage. Then, a branch portion that guides the entered game ball to a different side of the game member in the front-rear direction from the first ball passage, and
A game ball that has entered the branch portion is located on the front side or the rear side of the game area where the first ball passage is provided and at a position that overlaps at least a part of the first ball passage in the front-rear direction. The second ball passage provided so that it can pass through,
The approach probability changing means, which is arranged so that the approach probability of the game ball to the branch portion can be changed by the launch operation of the game ball, is provided .
The approach probability changing means is provided with a flow-down area on the left side where the game ball flows down on the left side when viewed from the player side, and a flow-down area on the right side where the game ball flows down on the right side.
An approachable state in which the game ball enters the branch portion after contacting the approach probability changing means and the game ball can enter the second ball passage.
A state in which more game balls flow down the flow-down region on the left side of the approach probability changing means without the game balls entering the branch portion than in the approachable state.
The state in which more game balls flow down the flow-down region on the right side with respect to the approach probability changing means without the game ball entering the branch portion than in the approachable state is changed by the launch operation of the game ball. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be possible. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

Images